Autodesk Inventor 8

®

Essentials

Official Training Courseware

52708-010000-1710A

January 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, MultiMaster Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc., trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Autodesk Inventor Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Assembly Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Presentation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Templates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Project Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Project Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Editing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 The Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 The Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3D Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Exercise: The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 How To Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Visual Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Help For AutoCAD Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Autodesk Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Sketch Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Sketch Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

i

Rules for Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Sketch Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Precise Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Sketch Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Exercise: Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Planning Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Showing and Deleting Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Exercise: Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Parametric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Additional Options for Applying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Automatic Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Displaying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 3: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketches and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Sketch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sketch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Model Edge Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Extrude Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Revolve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 133 134 136 137 139 140 141 143 145 148 152 153 154 155 159 160 163 165 166 167 168

ii

Contents

Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Exercise: Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Default Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 The Work Plane Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Examples of Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Work Plane Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Exercise: Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Default Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 The Work Axis Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Example of Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Work Axis Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Exercise: Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Center Point Work Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 The Work Point Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Grounded Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Additional Examples of Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Exercise: Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 The Fillet Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Exercise: Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 The Chamfer Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Exercise: Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 The Hole Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Exercise: Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 The Shell Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Exercise: Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 The Rectangular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 The Circular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Exercise: Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

iii

The Face Draft Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266 269 270 271 273 274 275

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Place Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Resequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Place Component Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sources of Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components into an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parts in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Work Features in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Projected Edges and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unconstrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving and Rotating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 279 285 286 287 288 289 291 292 292 295 296 297 298 299 301 302 303 305 307 309 312 313 314 318 319 321 324 325 326 328 328 329 332 334 335 336 340 344

iv

Contents

Editing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Using ALT-Drag to Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Exercise: Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Adaptive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Introduction to Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Methods for Creating Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Adaptive Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Applying Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Exercise: Adaptive Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 The Analyze Interference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 The Analyze Faces Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Locating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Exercise: Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Creating a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Creating Tweaks and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Animating a Presentation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Exercise: Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Editing the Default Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Creating Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Creating Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Defining a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Defining a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Editing Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Exercise: Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Creating a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Creating Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Editing Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Exercise: Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

v

Assembly Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieving Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes and Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

441 443 445 446 447 450 451 452 453 456 459 460 461 463 464 465 466 469 470 471 472 476 477 478 479 480 481 486 490 491 492 500 507 511 516 521 522 523

Chapter 8: Project Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Irrigation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

vi

Contents

Preface .

Autodesk Inventor is designed for easy learning. Course Objectives At the end of this course. This manual is part of the Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) series designed primarily for instructorled classes. and to encourage self-learning through the use of the Autodesk Inventor Design Support System (DSS). Each chapter in this manual has instructional design so that it is easy to follow and understand. Windows NT 4. 2 Preface . you will be able to: Prerequisites This course is designed to teach new users of Autodesk Inventor the essential elements of using Autodesk Inventor 8 for Mechanical Design. The primary objectives of the manual are to help you become productive quickly with the features and functionality of Autodesk Inventor 8. 2D Drafters wanting to learn the basics of 3D design techniques are also encouraged to attend this course.Preface Preface Preface Introduction Welcome to Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials Courseware. it can also be used for self-paced learning. and a working knowledge of parametric solid modeling concepts. or Windows XP. a training manual for use in Authorized Training Centers and in corporate training and classroom settings. Note Instructor-led training in either short or long courses is an effective method to learn computer application software. It is recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 98. Although this manual is designed to be used as a teaching tool for instructor-led courses. Each exercise is taskoriented and is based on real-world examples of mechanical engineering. The integrated Design Support System (DSS) provides you with ongoing support as well as access to online documentation.0/Windows 2000.

All Rights Reserved 3 . Each topic contains an Introduction.Chapter Flow • • Introduction and Objectives. Concepts. Prerequisite and Summary. constraints or warnings about the topic. Summary. Inc. Provides an introduction to the chapter theme and states specific learning objectives for the chapter. Tip Notes can contain information that provides guidelines. Topics. there are Notes and Tips included for special attention. Objectives. • Notes and Tips Throughout this courseware. Each chapter is a collection of topics that together form the theme of the chapter. Summarizes the chapter. Tips provide special information that will enhance your productivity within the topic. Note Exercise Data Files Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Projects Most engineers work on several projects at a time. Each exercise has a project file that stores the paths to all the files related to the exercise. Installing the Exercise Data Files To install the files: Step 1.exe. If the wizard does not automatically start. Insert the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer and follow the instructions in the setup wizard. To accommodate this.Exercise Data Files The exercise data files for this manual are supplied in a self-installing file called Setup. Autodesk Inventor uses projects to help organize related files and maintain links between files. 2. 4 Preface . The Essentials folder contains the files necessary to complete each exercise in the training manual. To work on a different project.exe on the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD attached to the back cover of your book. and each project may consist of a number of files. browse to the root directory of the CD and double-click Setup. 3. When you attempt to open a file. By default. the exercise files will be installed to the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AOTC\Inventor 8\Essentials folder unless you use the Browse button to specify a different folder. Autodesk Inventor uses the paths in the current project file to locate other necessary files. you set a new project active in the Project Editor.

Access the help system and other online resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software. you will be able to. • • File types in Autodesk Inventor.. Panel Bar. Create and edit project files for use in different environments and situations. The online help and tutorials available for learning. • • Start an Autodesk Inventor design session.. and the types of files you can create and use with Autodesk Inventor software. Identify the main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.Introduction to the Modeling Process Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. and other interface features that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design environments. The typical workflow on a design session in Autodesk Inventor. Create a design using various methods and workflows. The Browser.. • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Project files in Autodesk Inventor. Creating and editing project files. The Design Support System or DSS. The main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.. • • • • • • • • • . different assembly modeling concepts. The help system and tutorials available to Autodesk Inventor users. Different types of project files and the environments in which they should be used.

Objectives After completing this lesson. 6 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Getting Started Overview Overview Overview In this lesson you will learn the Autodesk Inventor software interface. Understand how to use template files. Understand the concept of Parametric Modeling. and file types. Understand the available file types in Autodesk Inventor. Understand the typical design workflow when using Autodesk Inventor. workflow. you will be able to: • • • • • Start an Autodesk Inventor design session.

Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session The first time you start an Autodesk Inventor design session. Learn how to build models quickly: This option opens the main page to a series of helpful tutorials such as Using Constraints. Creating a Part. Inc. All Rights Reserved 7 . Each link • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Features include slide graphics with links to specific help files and other information related to the differences between the software applications. Learn about AutoCAD to Inventor Help: This option launches a help file specifically designed for AutoCAD users making the transition to Autodesk Inventor. Learn about projects: This option presents the Autodesk Inventor Help Site Map. this screen will present you with links to some helpful information. and Advanced Topics. Learn about constraints: This option launches a multi-media presentation that will teach you about constraints. Procedure Open Dialog Box . Creating Assemblies. with focus on the Autodesk Inventor Projects help links. If you are new to Autodesk Inventor or if you have just upgraded to the most current release.Getting Started Pane Getting Started • • • See "What's New" in Autodesk Inventor: This link opens a help file containing all the new features in this release. the open dialog box will appear showing the Getting Started screen with links to various resources.

Open Pane Open In the Open dialog box. click New and a list of all available templates for creating Autodesk Inventor files will be displayed.New Pane New In the Open dialog box. Open Dialog Box . Metric Tab: Lists the available Metric Unit templates. • • • Default Tab: Lists the default templates based upon the default units type you select during installation. 8 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .presents a help topic with specific information on each project. English Tab: Lists the available English Unit templates. click Open and the three main areas of the Open dialog box will be displayed. in the What To Do area. in the What To Do area. Open Dialog Box .

Project Definition Pane: This window displays the project categories and paths defined for each category. • • • Open Dialog Box . Main Window: All files and folders contained in the selected location are listed in this window.Projects Pane Projects In the Open dialog box. • List of Available Projects: Double click on the project to make it active. The active project will have a check mark next to the project name. in the What To Do area. All Rights Reserved 9 . The Project Location column displays the path where the project is stored. Each folder icon represents a shortcut you can select to list its files and subfolders. Inc.• Locations: This window presents the folders defined in the active project file. • More detailed information on Projects will follow later in this chapter. Standard Windows Navigation Buttons: Autodesk Inventor uses standard Microsoft Windows®navigation tools in all of its file related dialog boxes. click Projects and Projects . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Preview Window: This window will display a preview of the selected Autodesk Inventor file.Select a project file areas will be displayed.

Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts Autodesk Inventor is a parametric modeler.Before and After Dimensions 10 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . the geometry to which it has been applied will also change to reflect the new value of the parameter. adaptive capabilities in Autodesk Inventor will enable the related parts to change without the need to create complex cross-part parametric equations. This means that the geometry is controlled by the parameters and/or constraints that you apply. Adaptivity enables you to create dynamic relationships between parts in an assembly. when you create a 2D sketch in a parametric modeler. You do not need to draw your lines and circles at specific lengths or diameters. As you create these dimensions. you focus only on the shape of the sketch. For example. After you create the sketch you place the required dimensions and the sketch geometry will update to reflect the dimension values you enter. Concept Another key aspect to Inventor is it ability to create adaptive parts. Sketch . As opposed to non-parametric systems whose dimension values are representative of the size of the geometry. When one part changes. they are stored as individual parameters which you can change at a later time. If the parameter changes.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. When you extrude your 2D sketch. Constraint properties such as Offset and Angle values are stored as parameters within the assembly. As you create your parametric model. the depth of the extrusion is also stored as a parameter and is then used to drive the geometry representing the extrusion. you may use it in an assembly file along with other parts. These parameters are created automatically and are used by the application to resolve geometry as new features are added. All Rights Reserved 11 . After you create the part. The parametric capabilities are now extended to the assembly environment by using 3D Constraints to constrain the parts together. Note: Is is possible to change these parameters to include formulas or use recognizable names such as Length and Width. the parameters are stored in a table that you can access later and change if necessary.The parametric capability then extends beyond the sketch level to the 3D feature level.

After you create the parts and assembly. It is possible to retrieve the parametric dimensions used in creating the geometry as well as additional dimensions as required. Drawing views are created and maintain an associative link to the part and assembly. If changes occur in the part or assembly files. The image below represents the basic file references that exist in a typical parametric design. those changes will be reflected in the drawing. Basic Parametric File Relationships 12 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . the parametric technology is extended to the drawing environment.

As you proceed through this course. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Use both Sketched and Placed Features to create the 3D geometry you require for your design.Autodesk Inventor Workflow Autodesk Inventor has been designed to facilitate the typical workflow you will encounter in the design process. As the designer. Because typical design workflow changes and evolves with the design. Place and constrain the parts in the 3D Assembly (required only when the component is part of a larger assembly of components). All Rights Reserved 13 . The overall workflow of any Autodesk Inventor design will involve the following steps. and drawings. Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Workflow Overall Workflow of a Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Session. Use one of the templates provided to create your new part. there is no set workflow for creating designs using Autodesk Inventor. On the initial sketch you create. the workflow for creating designs in Autodesk Inventor is flexible. With the exception of a couple of fundamental rules. you learn more about each of the steps listed below. within each step further variations will occur. draw the profile of the parts base feature. Projects are used to resolve file references for assemblies. Inc. • • • • • Be aware of your current Autodesk Inventor Project. you will choose the appropriate path based upon your design intent. presentations. Procedure In this lesson you will learn the typical workflow of an Autodesk Inventor design session.

Tangent and Insert to position and constrain the parts to other parts in the assembly. create the Presentation representing the exploded assembly. • • • • Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part. 14 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .• • If the design requires an exploded view. Use standard assembly constraints such as Mate. Create the profile of your geometry on the initial sketch. Place existing parts into the assembly or create new parts in the context of the assembly. Creating 2D Drawings. Repeat the steps above until all components are added to the assembly. • • • • Create a new assembly using one of the assembly templates provided. Part Design Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts using Autodesk Inventor software. All new parts you create will have a blank sketch automatically placed. You create Additional Sketched and/or Placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D geometry. Angle. Assembly Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating assemblies using Autodesk Inventor software. You then use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your Base Feature.

Use standard view creation tools to create the required 2D drawing views. Inc. Use the annotation tools to create the required annotation. The file extension is *. • • • • Use one of the drawing templates provided to create a new drawing. Part Files Part files represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor.ipt Principle Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Drawing Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating drawings using Autodesk Inventor software. All Rights Reserved 15 . Repeat the steps above to create additional sheets and views as required. You use the part file to describe the individual parts which make up an assembly.

It is also possible to animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken apart. File extension: *. File extension: *.ipn Principle 16 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Assembly Files Principle Assembly files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your assembly.iam Presentation Files You use presentation files to create exploded views of the assembly. The assembly file contains references to all of its component files. You use assembly constraints to constrain all of the parts to each other.

File extension: *. You can also use drawing files to create simple 2D drawings in much the same way you would use other 2D drawing programs.idw Principle Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and views required for manufacturing. the views are associative to the 3D model and changes in model geometry are automatically reflected in the drawing. Inc. Drawing files include dimensions.Drawing Files You use drawing files to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design. annotations. When you use a drawing file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model. All Rights Reserved 17 .

properties such as units. By using the template files you create. a new tab will appear in the Open dialog box with the name of your new folder. then select the appropriate template and click Open. (b) English. inch and feet and (b) Metric. and default tolerances are automatically applied to your new file. and (c) Metric. click the tab representing the required unit type. while the English and Metric tabs present template files for their respective units.Templates To create a new Autodesk Inventor file. The Default tab presents templates based upon the default unit you select during installation. Need Your Own Custom Template Tab? Tip Create a new folder containing at least one file in the templates folder of your Autodesk Inventor installation. Principle Autodesk Inventor offers template files for each type of file. Template files are categorized into two main groups: (a) English for english units. snap spacing. 18 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . The next time you create a new Autodesk Inventor file. The Open dialog box offers three tabs: (a) Default.Using Templates Files Template files serve as the basis for all new files you create using Autodesk Inventor software. Open Dialog Box . for metric units such as millimeter and meter.

All Rights Reserved 19 . the location of the part files must be resolved. Inc. The same is true when loading a drawing or presentation files. In this lesson you will learn the concept and implementation of Autodesk Inventor software Project files. When an assembly file is loaded.Projects in Autodesk Inventor Overview Overview Overview You use project files to resolve path locations of Autodesk Inventor software files. Active Project Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • • • • Understand the concept of Projects Understand the concept of Autodesk Inventor project files Setup Autodesk Inventor Projects Create Autodesk Inventor Projects Edit Autodesk Inventor Project files Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

presentation. 20 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . The below image represents file dependencies that exist in a typical assembly design. drawing. The design and documentation of a single part file will require at least two separate files: (a) a part file and (b) a drawing file. Typical File Dependencies When you open an assembly. This is the sole purpose of project files. Autodesk Inventor software knows exactly where to look for the required files when opening an assembly. each one will consist of multiple files and file types. and (c) drawing files. or drawing file. Project Concepts Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most parametric modeling systems. the active project file is used to resolve path locations to the referenced files.Project Concepts When you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs. The design and documentation of assembly models will require a minimum three different file types: (a) assembly files. (b) part files. By storing path information for each project. or presentation file.

but only one project can be active at any time. You will generally create one project file for each design you create. Do not use it for design project data. Example List of Available Projects Project File Categories Each Project file is divided into separate categories in which you will define different paths.Concept There is no limit to the number of project files you can create. Only one designer should use a project with a defined workspace in a single session of Autodesk Inventor at a time. Project Files . For single-user and vault modes. the active project is identified by the check mark. semi-isolated. A typical Autodesk Inventor design will make use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and the environment in which you are working. Do not make a local search Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and vault modes. The same is true for Autodesk Inventor Project files. All Rights Reserved • • 21 . Local Search Paths: Avoid using a local search path except for design exploration. In the below image. Inc. Project File Categories • Included File: In a semi-isolated environment.Project Files When you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. the workspace should be the only defined editable location. Workspace: A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design files in single-user. the master project shared by the design team is included in individual projects so that all data in the workgroup folder are accessible and managed from a single project.

• • Project Categories . or can also include common parts that you design. Because the library name is stored in the reference. Libraries 2. The common factors in all Libraries is that the path is considered by Autodesk Inventor software to be read-only and parts stored within a library search path rarely. Project Category Search Order When examining this diagram. change. then the order each category appears in the Project window. 22 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . changing the library name later will break library references. Libraries: You use this category to define search paths for part libraries.path a subfolder of the workspace folder. it will search for files using paths contained in each category using the following order. • • Component files exist in the Components folder. Part libraries can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you use in your designs. if ever. When Autodesk Inventor software needs to locate referenced files.Search Order Knowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and managing project files. Options: You use these properties to set specific options for the Project file. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Local Search Paths 4. If library folders are defined. Assembly files exist in the Robot Assembly folder. The below image represents a typical Project file with path locations defined in each category. Workgroup Search Paths A simple way to remember the search order is to remember Libraries first. Workspace 3. 1. Local search paths are searched after the workspace is searched. • Workgroup Search Paths: Workgroup folder locations are defined in the project workgroup search path and are the master project locations used by shared and semi-isolated modes for file check out and check in. you will see the assembly file is stored in a different location from the component files.

it is used to resolve the component locations. All Rights Reserved 23 . File Resolution Example Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The Hex Cap Screw is stored in a folder defined as a Library category. Inc.Because the Components folder is a sub-folder of the defined workspace.

Note: You cannot edit the active Project or activate a different project. Edit Project Pane: Select the category or right-click on the option you want to change. enabling you to easily navigate to the search path. Procedure In this lesson you will learn how to setup Project files for both a single-user and multiuser environment. For example. The Category Search Path stores the path location. Open Dialog Box . if there are files open in Autodesk Inventor software. Typical Single-User Project Select Project Pane: Select a Project to edit or double-click on a Project to activate it. 24 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . • • The Named Shortcut will appear in the Open dialog box. When you edit search paths they are divided into two sections: (a) Named Shortcut and (b) Category Search Path.Project Pane The Projects portion of the Open dialog box is divided in to two panes.Project Setup How you setup your Projects will depend largely on the type of environment in which you are working. setting up Projects for a single user environment will differ from multi-user environment.

the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the Named Shortcuts contained in the active Project. Inc. Using Relative Paths in Your Project Files It is possible to set your Project file to use relative paths instead of storing the complete path in each category. All Rights Reserved 25 . the Robot-Assembly. Relative Paths On/Off Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.ipj file is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly. When you enable the Use Relative Paths setting.Location Shortcuts When you Open files. the path settings begin with . Using relative paths enables greater portability of your Project Files and datasets.\ followed by the folder location relative to the physical location of the Project file.Open Dialog Box . In the following example.

then click the Files tab. click Application Options. you need an efficient way of locating them.When you use relative paths in your Project file.Project File Location Projects Folder Option Because you can store your project files in a number of different locations. This will help to keep your project file organized with your designs and will simplify portability issues. Autodesk Inventor software uses Windows®shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer. On the Tools menu. Rather than search every folder on your computer or network. If you would like to use a different path for your Project files. Project File Location We recommend that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design folders. enter or browse a new location. The default Projects Folder option is will be set to your My Documents folder.Projects Folder 26 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . As long as the folders maintain their relative location to the storage location of the Project file. Options Dialog Box . Autodesk Inventor will be able to resolve the files as required. Typical File Structure . it is possible to physically move the entire folder structure to another location or storage device.

if you change the folder structure. set up a folder structure before you create a project and start saving files. To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems. • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. They are Windows®shortcuts to the actual project files. copy them to a library folder.In the below image. Keep the subfolder structure relatively flat and do not store files that are unrelated to the project under the root folder. standard components unique to your company. move. You can keep all your design files for a project in the subfolders. it is a good idea to set up subfolders under your project workspace or workgroup folder. the My Documents folder is selected to list all files. you are likely to break file references. or electrical components. Inc. fittings. copy them to the desired workspace or workgroup subfolder. and off-the-shelf components such as fasteners. making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. Listing of Project File Shortcuts Setting Up Folder Structures A typical project might have parts and assemblies unique to the project. or define a library in your project that locates the root folder of the project in which the parts were released. Because references are stored as relative paths from project folders. To help organize your design files. If you intend to reference existing design files. If you plan to edit files from existing designs. Avoid storing more than one hundred files in a single folder. The Project file shortcuts in the right-hand pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. All Rights Reserved 27 . Use these guidelines as you create a folder structure for files associated with a project: • • • Follow your company standards and naming conventions for the project folders. Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders. or rename files.

you can locate the workgroup on his or her computer and make it available as a network share to other team members. If one designer is doing most of the work.\. All design files are in one folder (the workspace) and its subdirectories. You do not have to check out files. Multi User = Off Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required). shared is the least flexible because all design team members share a single workgroup location. Of the multi-user modes. Original files are stored in a personal workspace that is intended to be used by only a single user. If library folders are defined.) Not defined. A shared project defines a workgroup location and one or more library locations. Typical Multi-User Off (single) project setup Included File Workspace search paths Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Not defined. changing the library name later will break library references. • Shared: Shared user mode is only appropriate for small design groups with well-defined roles for editing design files.Multi-User Project Settings There are four Multi-User settings that you can use to control the type of Project. (Same location as project file. The file check-out status is not available in the browser. One defined at . Set the project to Use Relative Paths = True. each needs a descriptive name that should not change.\. Not defined. One or more defined. Because the library name is stored in the reference. The setting you choose will largely depend upon your working environment. Place the project Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process Options 28 . and locate the Workgroup at . except for files referenced from libraries. • Off (Single User): You use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup.

Designers can see when someone has a file checked out and are prevented from replacing the work of one another. semi-isolated mode is the most powerful of the multi-user options. Design team members always have access to the most up-to-date versions when they open files or refresh them. Design team members open. If necessary.(. Canceling a check out makes it available to other designers but does not restore it to its state before check out. you have access to only the number of file versions you specify in the project. (Same location as project file. Note that checking out a file does not protect it from being moved. Multi User = Shared Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required). or work with copies of parts and assemblies to evaluate design variations. Unlike the vault. work on. • Semi-Isolated: If Autodesk Vault is not available. All Rights Reserved 29 .) Not defined.\. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. where they make and save file changes. Typical Shared mode project setup Included File Workspace search paths Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Not defined. If library folders are defined.ipj) in the workgroup folder. Not defined. and save the original files directly in the workgroup folders where they are stored. you can cancel the Options Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Design team members share the workgroup location. or deleted using Microsoft®Windows Explorer. One or more defined. and cannot access vault advanced database query and configuration capabilities. Inc. Semi-isolated mode is useful when you need to isolate a part or subassembly. changing the library name later will break library references. copied. rather than copy them locally. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. after you make design changes and decide to discard them. Because the library name is stored in the reference. One defined at .

check out to revert the file back to the original file. One advantage semi-isolated mode has over vault mode is that each designer needs only enough workspace storage for files he or she is actively editing, and there is no need to update the workspace to see changes other designers have checked in. Each designer always has access to the latest checked-in changes, plus any personal changes. All design team members share a master project, which is included in their personal project, and defines the workgroup and library locations of the design project data files. Checking out files automatically copies them from the workgroup to your personal workspace for editing. Checked-out files are saved to your personal workspace after editing. Files not checked out continue to be referenced from the central work group location and cannot be saved. Design team members do not see changes to files saved by others until the files are checked in to the workgroup location. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Upon file check in, the file is automatically copied from your personal workspace to the workgroup removed from your personal workspace, and the previous version moved to the OldVersions folder. The workgroup uses this new version when the file is opened or checked out in the future. Canceling a check out removes the file reservation, deletes the workspace version, and leaves the original file in the workgroup. No changes are saved to the file. When you save a file, the previous version is moved to the OldVersions folder. Any designer that already had the file open will continue to access that version until they refresh or close and reopen the file.

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
Included File Workspace search path Local search paths Workgroup search paths Not defined. Not defined. Not defined. One defined at .\.

30

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
Library Locations When library locations are defined, each must have a descriptive name that does not change and a UNC-based location. The library name is stored as part of the references to files it contains. Library locations can be defined to be in a subfolder of the workgroup, particularly for cases such as the content library. For example, the name would be Content Library and the location would be ./Content Library. Options Multi User = Semi-Isolated Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).

Personal Project (one for each user) setup
Included File Location of the workgroup project using a UNC path. You can browse to the included file from the project editor or enter the path. Location of your personal workspace. Locate the personal project at .\(your personal workspace folder). Not defined. Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file. Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file. Use relative path = True Other options are inherited from the master project. • Vault: (You must install Autodesk®Vault to use this mode.)

Workspace search paths

Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Options

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

31

Creating Projects
You begin to create project files via a wizard type interface. You are prompted to fill in the relevant information such as Type of Project, Project Name, Workspace Folder, and Libraries to import from other Projects. After the initial creation is complete, you proceed to adding the required paths to the categories you will use.
Procedure

In this lesson you will learn how to create a project file.

Access Methods
You can use either the Autodesk Inventor internal project editor or the standalone project editor to create new projects. Menu Standalone Project Editor File > Projects Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Process Overview - Creating Single User Projects
The following steps represent an overview for creating a Single User Project. 1. 2. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Single User Project and click Next.

32

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

3.

In the Name field, enter Flange-Assembly and in the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter C:\Designs\FlangeAssembly. Click Next.

4.

If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

33

Process Overview - Creating Semi-Isolated Projects
The following steps represent an overview for creating a Semi-Isolated Project. Your begin by creating a Master Project. 1. 2. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Master Project and click next.

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for the Master Project. In the Project (Workgroup) Folder, enter a path to the Workgroup folder and click Next.

34

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

4.

If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

After you create your Master Project you create a Personal Project. 1. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, select the Master Project to use for your Personal Project, then click New.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

35

2.

In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Workspace and click Next.

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for your Workspace Project and enter a path for your workspace. Verify the Master Project File is listed correctly and click Finish. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

36

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Editing Projects
You can use the internal Project Editor or the Standalone Project Editor located on the Windows®Start menu to edit projects. In the Select Project Pane, select the Project to edit. In the Edit Project Pane select the category or option you need to edit. Depending on the item you edit, different options will be available on both the shortcut menu and to the right of the Edit Project Pane.
Procedure

Command Access
There are two methods available for editing projects. Menu Standalone Project Editor File > Projects Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Project Pane - Open Dialog Box

When editing projects, right-clicking on the various categories or options will display the following shortcut menus.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

37

Included File Options

Open: This option opens the project file used in the included file link. Edit: This option edits the link to the included project file. Delete: This option deletes the link to the included project file.

Workspace and Library Category Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Enter a named shortcut and search path in the fields below the category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Paste Path: This option pastes a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: This option deletes all paths from the category.

Local and Workgroup Category Search Path Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Add Paths from Directory...: Select this option to add the path of a selected directory including all sub-directories. Paste Path: Select this option to paste a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: Select this option to delete all paths from the category.

38

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Multi-User Options

Off: Use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. Shared: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may access the same data files. This option enables you to take advantage of the Check-Out/CheckIn features. When you edit any file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time, the file will remain in its current folder but will be locked from editing by other users. Semi-Isolated: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may be accessing the same data files. When you edit a file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time the file will be copied to the workspace defined in your project. The original file remains in its original location, but it is locked from editing until you check-in the version contained in your workspace folder. Vault: Only available if Autodesk Vault is installed.

Edit and Position Buttons
Edit and Position Buttons appear on the right-side of the Projects dialog box. Move Up: Select this option to move the selected path up in the search order within its category. Move Down: Select this option to move the selected path down in the search order within its category. Add Path: Select this option to add a path to the selected category. Edit Path: Select this option to edit the selected path.

Editing the Active Project
You must close all files in Autodesk Inventor before attempting to edit the active project.
Note

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

39

From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor In this exercise. You are creating a Single User Project file with a Workspace and Library. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. you will create the Project file to be used for the remainder of this course. Completed Active Project File 40 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Presentation. Inc.The User Interface Overview Overview Overview In this lesson you will learn about the Autodesk Inventor 8 software interface. you will be able to: • • • • • • Identify the Browser in the Assembly. All Rights Reserved 41 . Part. and Drawing environments Identify the Panel Bar Identify the Standard toolbar and groups of standard tools Understand how the menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment you are using Identify and use Keyboard Shortcuts Identify the 3D Indicator and what it represents Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Autodesk Inventor Interface Objectives After completing this lesson.

It is context sensitive with the environment you use. Part Modeling Environment When you use the browser in the Part Modeling Environment. and Z Planes. While you use the Part Modeling environment. Procedure As you progress through this course. when you work on an assembly you use the browser to present information specific to the assembly environment.Part Modeling Assembly Modeling Environment . the browser displays information that is relevant to part modeling. It will also list all features you use to create the part. and Center Point. It will also list all parts you use in the assembly. Y. Axes. Y. you will use the various browser modes. an edit box will appear at the bottom of the browser enabling you to edit the offset or angle value for the constraint. Axes.The Browser The Browser is one of your main interface components. If you select an assembly constraint. Browser . it will display the origin folder containing the default X. For example. and Z Planes. and Center Point. it displays the origin folder containing the default X. Features are listed in the order in which they are created. 42 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Position View When you use the browser in the Assembly Modeling Environment. Nested under each part you will see the assembly constraints.

it will display the Presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the explosion. Browser .Presentation View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Assembly Modeling Presentation Environment When you use the browser in the Presentation environment. Browser . This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly. When you expand each weak you will see the part(s) included in each one.Note: If you select the Position View drop-down button you can select Modeling View to switch the browser to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints. All Rights Reserved 43 . It is also possible button to switch the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View to select the or Assembly View. Inc.

It will also display each sheet in the drawing along with the views you create for each. title blocks and sketched symbols.Drawing Environment In the Drawing Environment. borders. Browser . the browser displays the Drawing Resource folder containing sheet formats.Drawing Modeling 44 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling. For example. Assembly Panel Bar . Right-click anywhere on the Panel Bar and select Expert. Procedure The Assembly Panel Bar is displayed below in the default Learning mode.Expert Mode Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Learning Mode Select the Assembly Panel drop-down menu and click Expert. The context sensitive design presents the relevant tools based upon the current context of your design session. Inc. Note: You can also access the Expert mode.The Panel Bar The panel bar is your primary interface to the tools available while you design. The Panel Bar switches to Expert mode. names. This mode allows more area for the browser window. All Rights Reserved 45 . The tool icons. the panel bar will automatically switch to display the correct tools for the context where you work. Tools are displayed with icons only. Assembly Panel . and keyboard shortcuts are displayed.

Sketch Panel Bar 46 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .You use the Part Modeling Panel Bar to create sketched and placed features in the modeling environment. and constraints. Part Modeling Panel Bar You use the Sketch Panel Bar in the modeling environment and for assembly based sketching to create 2D parametric sketches. dimensions.

Presentation Panel Bar You use the Drawing Views Panel Bar in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet. and animate geometry in the presentation environment. Drawing Views Panel Bar Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.You use the Presentation Panel Bar to create presentation views. All Rights Reserved 47 . tweaks.

You use the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and other annotation objects. Drawing Annotation Panel Bar 48 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Standard Toolbar . and others.Viewing Tools This area of the toolbar displays appearance related tools for controlling your model's appearance. This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file and modeling operations. Rotate. Procedure Customizing toolbars is beyond the scope of this course. Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar is displayed here in three separate images. Zoom Window.File and Modeling Tools This area of the toolbar displays standard viewing tools such as Zoom All. but by default only the Standard toolbar is displayed.Toolbars There are several toolbars available for you to use. Standard Toolbar . It is organized into groups based upon functionality. All Rights Reserved 49 .Appearance Tools Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Standard Toolbar . Please refer to the Autodesk Inventor help system for more information. Inc.

you should take the time to familiarize yourself with the different options that appear on the menu while working in different environments.Assembly Modeling Environment Insert Menu . Insert Menu . Procedure As you are learning Autodesk Inventor.Menu Structure Autodesk Inventor software utilizes the standard pull-down menu structure common in all Windows application.Part Modeling Environment Insert Menu . The menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment and mode you are using.Drawing Environment 50 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

The indicator displays your current view orientation in relation to the X. Part Modeling. you will use keyboard shortcuts to access tools. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same as clicking the tool on the panel bar or menu.Keyboard Shortcuts On the panel bar and menus. Y. the keyboard shortcuts will be listed for the tools as they are explained. P for Place Component. Procedure Where applicable. the 3D Indicator is displayed in the lower left area of the graphics window. All Rights Reserved 51 . N for Create Component. Procedure 3D Indicator Red: X-Axis Green: Y-Axis Blue: Z-Axis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and Presentation environments. For example. Shortcut Keys Displayed on Panel Bar 3D Indicator While using the Assembly. Inc. Z axis of the coordinate system.

click Exercise: The User Interface 2. 52 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . part modeling. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. You will experiment with different interface objects in the assembly. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. and sketching environments.Exercise: The User Interface Open an assembly and explore the Autodesk Interface. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. From the Main table of contents page.

and Tutorials are all available. context sensitive How-To presentations.Online Help and Tutorials Overview Overview Overview Autodesk Inventor software offers several types of online help and tutorial references. Standard Help files. Inc. Visual Syllabus Objectives After completing this lesson. All Rights Reserved 53 . you will be able to: • • • • • • • Understand Help Topics Use the How To Popups Access the Help Topic containing information on the new features in this Autodesk Inventor release Access tutorials Access the Visual Syllabus Access the Help for AutoCAD Users Access Autodesk Online Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In this lesson you will learn about the different resources available for learning Autodesk Inventor.

You can also enter search words in the left pane of the Help Topics window. icons may appear in the help topics representing specific tools. Help Topics . The Help Topics window is only one component of the Help System.Main Page As you navigate to specific topics in the help system. Click the icon to start the tool. Help Topics . Menu Toolbar Help > Help Topics Keyboard Shortcut F1 Use standard point and click navigation techniques to navigate the help system. You can access the Help Topics window by using the F1 key or any of the other methods listed below. Procedure Access Methods You can use either of the following methods to launch the help topic.Command Launch 54 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Help Topics A comprehensive Help Topics section installs by default.

click How To. All Rights Reserved 55 . will be displayed containing information on the selected tool in an animated sequence. The animated sequence will play automatically and you can select the navigation buttons to navigate to specific sequence numbers. click How To. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the How To Popups. Animated Tangent Line Show Me Presentation Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. Show Me Help Window The below image represents the type of information that is available in the context sensitive How To Popups. It presents information to you in a manner relevant to each task. Inc.How To Popups The Help System is context sensitive. and on the shortcut menu. A help topic. Right-click in the graphics window. or in some cases the Show Me help window.

Help Window What's New . and Sheet metal. All changes are organized into main categories such as Drawings. Menu Help > What's New What's New . Expand the category of interest and use standard point and click navigation to learn about the new features.Specific Topic 56 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the What's New help topic.What's New The What's New help topic contains information on all new features in the current release of Autodesk Inventor. Part Modeling.

Menu Help > Tutorials Inventor Tutorials . From the main tutorial window. All Rights Reserved 57 . Inc. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the tutorials. The tutorials present step by step information on performing certain tasks in Autodesk Inventor. use standard point and click navigation techniques to select the topic of interest.Main Window and Working with Projects Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Tutorials There are several tutorials available covering a wide range of topics from Introduction to Advanced.

Standard Toolbar Visual Syllabus .Main Window and Animated Presentation 58 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Information on the features you select will be presented to you in an animation. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Visual Syllabus.Visual Syllabus The Visual Syllabus presents topic specific information in an animated presentation. Start the Visual Syllabus. then select specific feature tools available. select the main topic.

Inventor Command Map Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 59 . Help for AutoCAD Users . Menu Help > Help for AutoCAD Users The below image represents the main window of the Help for AutoCAD Users help topic.Main Window AutoCAD . Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Help for AutoCAD Users.Help For AutoCAD Users AutoCAD users can use the Help Topic designed specifically for them as they make the transition to Autodesk Inventor software. Use standard point and click navigation options to navigate to the topic of choice. Inc.

Procedure The Autodesk Online portal contains dynamic and new information. Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Autodesk Online.com website dedicated to providing e-learning materials and tutorials for the Autodesk Inventor user. you will be arrive at a special area of the Autodesk. Select the Autodesk Inventor Skill Builders link. PDF.Skill Builders Link Autodesk Online 60 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . and other web-friendly formats. Menu Help > Autodesk Online Autodesk Online .Autodesk Online Autodesk Online is an e-learning portal to training information available for Autodesk software users. It is updated regularly. The information is presented via HTML.

click Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 61 . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. Inc. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials In this exercise you will use the online help and tutorials to create a new part with a simple sketch and features.

Utilize the information contained in this chapter as well as the information contained in the Help System to create the required projects. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. (a) Create a new Semi-Isolated Project to be used as a Master Project. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process 2. Completed Project File 62 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . then create a Personal Workspace Project and use the Included file option to include the Master Project. From the Main table of contents page. you will create two new Autodesk Inventor Project files.Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Print Exercise Reference In this exercise.

and which types of projects are used for particular situations. Inc. The file types created by Autodesk Inventor and how to use them in your designs. Creating and editing project files. The concept of project files and how they are used to maintain file references between Autodesk Inventor files. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The typical workflow of creating a design in Autodesk Inventor as well as different assembly modeling concepts. Accessing different tools. through the use of keyboard shortcuts. Accessing several different resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software. All Rights Reserved 63 .Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • Starting a design session using Autodesk Inventor software. The user interface for Autodesk Inventor software.

64 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Placing parametric dimensions to control the size of sketch elements. Planning and viewing constraints that have been applied to geometry.. Use construction geometry to assist in creating 2D sketch geometry. Editing sketches and using the Sketch Doctor to fix problems with sketches. Create sketches using the Precise Input toolbar. Applying dimensions manually and automatically. The sketch environment and available sketch tools. Options for displaying dimensions. Use the Sketch Doctor to assist in fixing problems with sketches. Apply dimensions to sketch geometry. • Create 2D sketches for use in 3D designs. Plan and implement constraints on 2D sketches. Using the sketch coordinate system. Geometric constraints and how they can be used. Using construction geometry to assist you in creating 2D sketches. Using the Precise Input toolbar..Introduction to Sketching Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Apply constraints manually and automatically. • • • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Guidelines for dimensioning sketches. Rules for creating efficient sketches... Dimensioning 2D sketches. Apply dimensions using both manual and automatic methods. you will be able to. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Different aspects of creating sketches in Autodesk Inventor software. Edit sketches. View and delete constraints that have been applied to geometry. Constraining sketches using both automatic and manual 2D constraints. .

The two-dimensional (2D) geometry contained in the sketch is used to create base features as well as secondary features.Creating Sketches Overview Overview Overview The fundamental basis for all three-dimensional (3D) designs begins with a sketch. Sketching using the Precise Input toolbar Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • • • • Understand the sketch environment Create sketch geometry Understand the rules for creating sketches Understand the Sketch Coordinate System Utilize the Precise Input interface to create sketch geometry Edit sketches Use the Sketch Doctor to fix sketch geometry 66 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

Sketch1: The first sketch in the part. Because sketches represent the most fundamental part of your design. the environment in which the geometry is created is always consistent. you work in an environment designed specifically for the creation of 2D geometry. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This is automatically created when you create a new part. Concept A typical part generally includes multiple sketches positioned along various planes. All Rights Reserved 67 . Inc. represents the X and Y axes of the sketch. Autodesk Inventor sketch environment Following are some important features in the sketch environment: Sketch panel bar: Displays the 2D sketching tools available. Sketch axes: Aligned with the sketch origin indicator. Each sketch contains different geometry. it is critical that you become comfortable with the environment in which they are created. Although the geometry varies from part to part. Sketch origin indicator: Used to identify the current location and orientation of the sketch origin and axes.Sketch Environment When you create sketches.

or work plane. Shortcut Menu Right-click the face of a part or a work plane. origin plane. If you require additional sketches. Creating additional sketches 68 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .Creating Additional Sketches The first sketch in a new part is automatically created. you must create them manually. Access Methods Toolbar Select the Sketch tool > Select a face or plane to orient the sketch. and on the shortcut menu click New Sketch. A new sketch can be created on a part face.

the Panel Bar automatically switches to display the available sketch tools. All Rights Reserved 69 . and Chamfer. Editing tools are covered in a later chapter. The 2D Sketch Panel contains all of the tools to assist in creating sketch geometry. Sketch Panel Bar Line Tool The Line tool enables you to create line segments on the sketch. Fillet. refer to the Help Topics for more information about sketch tools. Rectangle. Panel Bar Shortcut Key L Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Circle. Arc.Sketch Tools In the sketch environment. Procedure In this lesson you learn about the most common sketch tools: Line. Inc. If necessary.

Drag the cursor in the direction of the next line segment. Pick a point to end the line segment. If the Constraint Glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change. In the image sequence below. the second image demonstrates by scrubbing a different sketch element. 4. 3. On the Panel Bar. Pick a point to end the line segment. scrub geometry on the sketch for the constraint to be applied and continue drawing the line segment. 70 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . again paying attention to the Constraint Glyph indicating the automatic constraint. 2. 1.Process Overview . the first image shows that the third line segment is being constrained parallel to the first segment. Continue drawing line segments as required. and the third image shows that the constraint is now inferred to the sketch element being scrubbed. Drag your cursor in the direction you want to draw the line. click the Line tool and pick a starting point for the line segment. This glyph indicates the type of constraint that is being applied automatically to the line segments.Creating Lines The following steps represent an overview for creating lines in your sketch. Note the appearance of the Constraint Glyph.

Panel Bar Shortcut Key SHIFT+C Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Right-click in the graphics window. Continue drawing line segments as required. and click Done on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 71 . Inc. Circle Tool The Circle tool enables you to create circles on the sketch. 6.5.

Right-click in the graphics window. To create a 3-Point Tangent Circle. and click Done on the shortcut menu. and click Done on the shortcut menu. 4. 1. on the Panel Bar. Right-click in the graphics window. 72 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 2. To create a center point circle. click the Tangent Circle tool.Process Overview . 3. Drag your cursor to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle and pick that point to create the circle. 6.Creating Circles The following steps represent an overview for creating circles in your sketch. on the Panel Bar click the Center Point Circle tool and select the center point of the circle. Select three parts of the geometry that the circle will be tangent to. 5.

Inc. Creating Center Point Arcs: • On the Panel Bar. Note: Arcs are created in a counterclockwise direction so pick your start point accordingly. All Rights Reserved 73 .Arc Tool The Arc tool enables you to create arcs on the sketch. click the Center Point Arc tool then pick a point representing the center of the arc. • Pick a point representing the start point of the arc.Creating Arcs The following steps represent an overview for creating arcs in your sketch. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Panel Bar Process Overview .

and on the shortcut menu click Done. • Drag your cursor and pick the endpoint of the arc. • Right-click in the graphics window. 180-. • Right-click in the graphics window. 74 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Creating Tangent Arcs: • On the Panel Bar. and click Done on the shortcut menu. or 270-degree arc.• Pick a point representing the endpoint of the arc. click the Tangent Arc tool and pick the geometry being used for the arcs tangency. Note the Center Point Projection as you approach a 90-.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Depending upon existing geometry and arc size.Creating 3-Point Arcs: • On the Panel Bar. constraint glyphs may appear. • Right-click in the graphics window. and on the shortcut menu click Done. Inc. click the Three Point Arc tool and pick the start point of the arc. • Pick a point for the endpoint of the arc. • Drag your cursor to size the arc appropriately. All Rights Reserved 75 .

Creating a Two-Point Rectangle: 1. Panel Bar Process Overview . 76 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . and click Done on the shortcut menu Creating a Three-Point Rectangle: To create rectangles at angles other than 0 and 90 degrees. Right-click in the graphics window. 3. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle. 4.Rectangle Tool The Rectangle tool enables you to create rectangles on the sketch. 2.Creating Rectangles The following steps represent an overview for creating rectangles in your sketch. click the Three Point Rectangle tool. 5. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle. On the Panel Bar. On the Panel Bar. then pick a point representing the opposite corner of the rectangle. click the Two Point Rectangle tool.

6. click the Fillet tool and enter a radius for the fillet. Then drag the cursor to size the rectangle. On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Panel Bar 2D Fillet Dialog Box Radius: Enter a radius for the fillet feature. Inc. 8. click the Equal option. Pick a point representing the second point of the rectangle. Right-click in the graphics window.Creating Fillets The following steps represent an overview for creating fillets in your sketch. 1. All Rights Reserved 77 . and on the shortcut menu click Done. Fillet Tool The Fillet tool enables you to create fillets on the sketch. If you are creating multiple fillets of equal sizes. Applies an equal constraint to all fillets you create during the current session of the Fillet tool. Process Overview . 7.

4. 3. and click Done on the shortcut menu. 78 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Panel Bar 2D Chamfer Dialog Box This option will cause dimensions to be placed representing the chamfer. right-click in the graphics window. Pick the corner of the geometry being filleted or select each line separately. a dimension appears on only the first fillet you create. Continue selecting geometry or corners to be filleted. Notice with the Equal option set. Chamfer Tool The Chamfer tool enables you to create chamfers on the sketch.2. When you are finished adding fillets.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 1. All Rights Reserved 79 . Inc. On the Panel Bar. Distance1: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. 2. Distance: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer.Creating Chamfers The following steps represent an overview for creating chamfers in your sketch. adjust the options as required and select a point to chamfer or select the two entities separately. click the Chamfer tool. In the 2D Chamfer dialog box. Distance: Enter a distance for the chamfer to be applied equally to both sides. Process Overview .This option will constrain secondary chamfers by referencing dimension parameters from the first chamfer created during this session of the Chamfer tool. Angle: Enter a value for the angle of the chamfer. Distance2: Enter a value for the second side of the chamfer.

change the options in the dialog box and continue selecting points or geometry to create additional chamfers. On the Panel Bar. You then change the line segment to represent a centerline style.3. 80 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . in the 2D Chamfer dialog box. Using centerlines in your sketch will assist in creating revolve features and placing diametric profile dimensions. click the Line tool and draw a standard line segment where the centerline will be. you can draw regular line segments using the standard Line tool. 4. click Done. Instead. When you are finished adding chamfers.Creating Centerlines The following steps represent an overview for creating centerlines in your sketch. Process Overview . If necessary. 1. Creating Centerlines You cannot draw centerlines.

The centerline can now be used to place diametric profile dimensions. select Centerline.2. The selected line will be converted to a centerline style. Select the line segment and on the Standard toolbar. Inc. from the Styles drop-down list. All Rights Reserved 81 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

There will be times when you need to create sketch geometry that is not closed.Rules for Creating Sketches Creating sketch geometry is as easy as drawing a closed shape using Autodesk Inventor Sketch tools. There are several ways to create closed shapes. Use closed loops for profiles. Principle Following are some rules for successful sketching: • Keep the sketch simple. or polygon or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together to create a closed shape. Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to manage as designs evolve. You can use tools such as the rectangle.Example 82 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . • • • • • Creating Sketches . Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape. This lesson focuses on creating closed profiles. Accept default dimensions until the shape is stabilized. Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before size. for example a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect. circle.

you can right-click the sketch in the browser and on the shortcut menu. click Edit Coordinate System. All Rights Reserved 83 . you will not need to edit the sketch coordinates but if required. showing its current origin and orientation. Principle In most cases. You must exit the sketch before you edit the coordinate system so you can change the orientation of the axes and reposition the origin. exit the sketch and in the Browser. Independent Sketch Coordinates Editing the Sketch Coordinate System The following steps represent an overview for editing the Sketch Coordinate System. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. right-click the sketch and click Edit Coordinate System on the shortcut menu. 1. In the event you need to edit the sketch coordinate system.Sketch Coordinate System Each sketch you create has its own independent coordinate system. Inc. This coordinate system is based upon the location and method you use when you create the sketch and is completely independent from the 3D part model's coordinate system. The sketch coordinate icon appears.

3. select the origin of sketch coordinate icon.2. and then select a new point for the origin. The change the direction of the X or Y axis. click the axis then select a new edge to align the axis to. To change the sketch coordinate's origin. 84 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

Relative Orientation: This option is used when moving faces on a base solid. In the X and ° boxes. In the Y and ° boxes. It will rotate the axes of the active coordinate system. It is also possible to use this tool to create sketch geometry based on relative coordinates from other model geometry. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Subsequent points are relative to the last point picked or entered. Relative Orientation is not available while sketching. Y°: This format specifies a coordinate by y coordinate and angle from the positive X axis.Precise Input When creating sketch geometry it is possible to use the Precise Input toolbar to enter precise values or coordinates. select a data format. enter the desired values. XY: This format specifies a coordinate relative to the origin. This enables you to create sketch geometry at specific lengths or angles prior to placing parametric dimensions. Procedure Access Methods Use the following method to access the Precise Input tool: Toolbar View menu > Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input Precise Input Toolbar Relative Origin: This option enables you to enter coordinates relative to a point you select. The first point is relative to the origin. X°: This format specifies a coordinate by x coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. enter the desired values. Delta Input: This option sets the inputs as a delta to the last point picked or entered. enter the desired values. All Rights Reserved 85 . In the X and Y boxes. Input Type: From the drop-down list. Inc.

In the D and ° boxes. click a sketch tool such as Line. Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Precise Input tool. 4. Create a new sketch. On the 2D Sketch Panel Bar. 2. click the icon and pick a point on the sketch geometry. (Optionally enter offset values for the selected point. To set your relative Precise Relative point. enter the desired values. click Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input to display the Inventor Precise Input toolbar.) 86 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 3. On the View menu. 1.d°: This format specifies a coordinate by a distance and angle from the positive X axis.

The point is previewed. 6. select the desired Input Type and enter the appropriate values in the corresponding boxes. Click the Delta X Delta Y button to move the origin indicator to the last point. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Click to accept the position.The point is previewed. Click to accept the point. Inc. All Rights Reserved 87 . 5. Continue to enter additional input values as required. From the Input Type drop-down list.

Right-click in the graphics window and click done on the shortcut menu. Click to accept the point. 7. Click to accept the point. Continue to enter additional input values as required. 88 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . The point is previewed. 8.The point is previewed.

You can expand the Extrusion1 feature to expose the consumed sketch. The ability to edit these features is fundamental to any parametric modeling session. Editing the sketch places the model in a rolled back state. When you edit sketches. Procedure In this lesson you learn how to edit sketches. you will be creating multiple sketches. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch. All Rights Reserved 89 . You can see each of the sketches in the Browser by expanding the particular feature(s). the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and appears under the feature in the Browser. Inc. Note the change in appearance in the browser as the background color changes indicating the active feature. Revolve. Right-click the sketch and click Edit Sketch. you are returned to the sketch environment and the Panel Bar changes. Access Methods The following methods can be used to edit sketches. providing you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch. where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible. or Hole. As you edit the sketches. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In the image below.Editing Sketches As you build your parametric model. the changes are applied to the features based upon those sketches. Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1. When the sketch is used by a feature such as Extrude. Browser Browser Browser Double-click the sketch.

click the Return tool to exit the sketch environment. 90 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .Editing Sketches On the Standard toolbar.

dimensions. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 1. In the Browser. Once the sketch has been activated for editing. and constraints. you can make changes to geometry. right-click the feature or sketch and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 91 .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing sketches. Inc.

92 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 3. Continue to make edits to the sketch as required. click the Return tool to exit the sketch and return to the part model. on the Standard toolbar.2. When you are done editing the sketch. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features of the part.

and open loops.Sketch Problems Detected Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. right-click and click Sketch Doctor. Sketched Feature Dialog Box This icon is available in the Sketched Feature dialog box if a problem with the sketch is detected. Procedure In this lesson you learn how to use the Sketch Doctor to fix common problems in sketches.Sketch Doctor The Sketch Doctor is a tool that assists you in fixing common problems that can occur in your sketches. Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Sketch Doctor. Inc. Common problems include redundant points. Browser In the Extrude dialog box. The Sketch Doctor can correct some problems. Extrude Dialog Box . missing coincident constraints. which will diagnose and assist you in fixing the problems detected. while other problems may require manual editing and correction. All Rights Reserved 93 . the presence of the Red Cross icon indicates that problems have been detected with the sketch. You click this button to start the Sketch Doctor. While a sketch is activated.

By default. all tests are selected. you select the diagnostic tests to perform.In the Sketch Doctor dialog box. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box 94 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Sketch Doctor Dialog Box In the Diagnose Sketch dialog box. click Diagnose Sketch to start the diagnosis. Diagnose Sketch Dialog Box Detected problems are listed in the Sketch Doctor dialog box. You select the problem to recover and click Next.

Sketch Doctor Dialog Box Sketch Problems Tip Most sketch problems occur when you import 2D geometry from other applications. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.A problem diagnosis/description is displayed. Inc. Information about potential fixes is included. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box You select the appropriate treatment option and click Finish. and import only the geometry required for the sketch. Read the import options closely while importing geometry. All Rights Reserved 95 .

click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching.Exercise: Creating Sketches In this exercise. click Exercise: Creating Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 3D Part Created Using Sketches 96 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . From the Main table of contents page. 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create some basic sketch geometry use the sketch to create 3D features.

applied to a line segment. you will be able to: • • • • • • Understand the concept of constraining sketches Understand geometric constraints Understand how to plan constraints Show and delete constraints applied to 2D sketch geometry Use the Show All tool to show all constraints applied to a sketch Create and use construction geometry in the sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc to remain tangent to the geometry that it has been constrained. Inc. 2D Constraints on Part Sketch Objectives After completing this lesson. forces that line segment to always be vertical. For example. In this lesson you learn how to work with constraint sketches. All Rights Reserved 97 . a vertical constraint.Constraining Sketches Overview Overview Overview You use geometric constraints to control the sketch geometry to which they have been applied.

you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry. and colinear. In most cases the inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. or dimensions. As you continue to develop the sketch.Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor When you add constraints to 2D geometry. The sketch on the right is the result of adding additional constraints such as vertical. The sketch on the left was purposely drawn utilizing only some of the inferred constraints. some constraints are inferred (applied automatically). horizontal. that line is forced to be horizontal at all times. you are adding a level of intelligence to the 2D geometry. if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line. Principle As you create sketches. The following image illustrates the effect of constraints on sketch geometry. Sketch Before and After Constraining 98 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change as the result of constraint dragging. For example.

All Rights Reserved 99 .Geometric Constraints Procedure Geometric Constraints You can apply several different types of geometric constraints to your sketch geometry. right-click and click Create Constraint. The following image shows the 2D geometric constraints available from the 2D Sketch Panel. 2D Sketch Panel Shortcut Menu In the graphics window. Available Geometric Constraints Constraint Potential Sketch Elements Line Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is perpendicular to each other Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the 2D geometric constraints. In this lesson you learn about the different constraints available and how they can be used. Inc. Each constraint type offers a unique capability and is used to create a specific constraint condition.

Constraint Potential Sketch Elements Line Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is parallel to each other Constrained geometry is tangent to each other Constrains two points together. Endpoint of Line. Points. Circles. Points. Circles. Point. Arcs Lines. Arc Lines. Ellipse Axes Lines. Arcs Lines. Circle. Arcs 100 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Can constraint a line to a point Constrains circles or arcs to share the same center point location Constrains the geometry to lie along the same line Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the Y axis of the sketch coordinate system Constrains the geometry to have equal radii or lines to have the same length Constrains the geometry to fixed at its current position relative to the sketch coordinate system Constrains geometry to be symmetrical about a selected centerline Line. Arc Line. Pairs of Points (including Midpoints) Lines. Pairs of Points (including Midpoints) Lines. Circles. Center Point Circle.

On the Panel Bar. you have an opportunity to place additional types of constraints.Applying Constraints . Select a circle. 2. Apply a Horizontal Constraint between a point and a midpoint 1. In the exercise portion of this lesson. All Rights Reserved 101 . line. Select the circle. 3.Process Overview The following steps present an overview to applying different types of geometric constraints. line. Apply an Equal Constraint 1. click the Equal constraint tool. On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The selected geometry is now constrained to be Equal in size. or arc to apply the Equal constraint. or arc. click the Horizontal constraint tool. On the Panel Bar. Apply a Horizontal Constraint 1. Inc. 4. click the Horizontal constraint tool and select the geometry to be constrained.

Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle. 102 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .2. The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected. Select the midpoint of an existing line. 3.

2. 5. Select the second sketch element for the constraint.Apply a Symmetrical Constraint 1. 4. Tip: You only need to select the symmetry line once during the current session of the Symmetric Constraint tool. click the Symmetric constraint tool. Select the first sketch element for the constraint. 3. On the Panel Bar. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 103 . Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line. Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the Symmetric constraint.

some constraints are automatically applied. you must add constraints or delete existing constraints. those constraints do not always completely represent your design intent. Therefore. determine how sketch elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints. As you create sketch geometry. However. you should determine whether any degrees of freedom remain on the sketch. During the sketch creation process. If required. Concept In this lesson you learn how to plan constraints for your 2D sketch geometry. • Analyze automatically applied constraints.Planning Constraints As you create sketch geometry. Following are some key concepts regarding constraint planning. After the sketch is created. constraints are automatically applied. delete the automatically applied constraints and apply constraints to remove the degrees of freedom. • Determine sketch dependencies. 104 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. By stabilizing the geometry with constraints. You can use the constraint-drag technique to see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch. When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry. Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements. It is not necessary to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. take into account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. If necessary use the Fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch. you will be able to predict the effect the dimensions will have on the sketch geometry. All Rights Reserved 105 . In some situations you may be required to leave sketch geometry underconstrained. Inc. you should constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. As you place the parametric dimensions. • Stabilize shape before size.• Use only needed constraints.

106 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . By placing dimensions on larger elements first. Some constraint combinations may distort underconstrained portions of your sketch. It is important to understand that constraints and dimensions work together to constrain the geometry. you can minimize distortion on the sketch as it updates to reflect the dimensioned values. you can correct this distortion and generate a sketch that is properly constrained and meets your design intent.• Place dimensions on large elements before small ones. • Use both geometric constraints and dimensions. By using a combination of geometric constraints and parametric dimensions.

When constraining sketches.• Identify sketch elements that might change size. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. take into account features that may change as the design evolves. you will intentionally leave features underconstrained to enable them to adapt to other parts in the assembly. Inc. All Rights Reserved 107 . In the case of adaptive parts. leave those features underconstrained. When you identify sketch features that may change. This will allow the feature to change as the design evolves.

Deleting Constraints. The Show Constraints tool enables you to view the constraints applied to the selected geometry and if necessary. On the Show Constraints toolbar. The geometry referenced by the selected constraint will be highlighted. Procedure Access Methods The following method can be used to access the Show/Delete Constraints tool. 108 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . you may need to view and possibly delete some constraints. Lock the Constraint Toolbar.Showing and Deleting Constraints As you create and constrain your 2D sketches. select the constraint symbol and press DELETE. or right-click the selected constraint and click Delete. select the constraint(s) and delete them. 2D Sketch Panel Show/Delete Constraints Toolbar Viewing Constraints. click the constraint. Click the PushPin icon on the Show Constraints toolbar to leave the toolbar displayed until you close it. On the Show Constraints toolbar.

press DELETE.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for using the Show/Delete Constraints tool. Show Constraints Toolbar . or right-click the constraint symbol and click Delete. Inc. or select the geometry. You can lock the temporary toolbar by selecting the PushPin icon. Selecting the geometry will display the toolbar permanently until you close it. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. On the Panel Bar. 1. click the Show Constraints tool.Locked Mode Select the constraint symbol to view the geometry referenced by the constraint. Pausing over the geometry will display the Show Constraints toolbar temporarily until you move your cursor away from the toolbar. 4. Show Constraints Toolbar .Temporary Mode 3. Pause over. 2. To delete the constraint. All Rights Reserved 109 .

When you select the Show All Constraints tool.Hide all constraints The Constraint toolbars will appear next to each sketch element. Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained geometry. Select the constraint symbol and press DELETE to delete the constraint. Click and drag on the vertical bars of the toolbars to move them to another location. Keyboard Shortcut Sketch Showing All Constraints 110 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Procedure Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Show All Constraints tool.) F8 . Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element.Show All Constraints The Show All Constraints tool enables you to see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry. Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and click Show All Constraints.Show all constraints F9 . (Sketch must be active.

All Rights Reserved 111 . Inc. 1. you create. Sketch Containing Construction Geometry Process Overview . To do this. Concept You can use construction geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry as well as to constrain normal sketch geometry. In this lesson you learn how to create and constrain construction geometry.Creating Construction Geometry The following steps present an overview for creating construction geometry. constrain. Standard Toolbar In the following image below. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. construction lines are used to position the slot from the center of the circle and along the angled construction line. Create a new sketch or activate an existing sketch. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Construction geometry style. and dimension construction geometry just like any other 2D sketch geometry but when a 3D feature is created.Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch There may be times when you need to place geometry in your sketch that you do not want to be included in the 3D feature. the construction geometry is ignored.

Continue sketching geometry as required. 4.2. As you sketch the geometry it will be created as construction geometry. click one of the sketch tools to create the geometry. select Construction. 5. To switch back to normal geometry creation. 3. Constrain and dimension the geometry as required. on the Standard toolbar. 112 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Converting Normal Geometry to Construction Geometry Tip You can convert normal geometry to construction geometry by selecting the geometry. 6. then on the Standard Toolbar in the Styles drop-down list. select Normal from the Styles drop-down list. On the Standard toolbar. On the Sketch Panel Bar. select Construction from the Styles drop-down list.

2. Simple Part with Constrained Sketches Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 113 . From the Main table of contents page. Sketched features are used in this exercise. More information on these features is presented in the next chapter. Inc. you create and constrain both normal and construction geometry. Using the concepts and procedures learned in this lesson. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching.Exercise: Constraining Sketches In this exercise. you create and constrain sketch geometry. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Constraining Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

dimensions size the sketch according to your design intent. 3D Part with Parametric Dimensions Objectives After completing this lesson. While geometric constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable.Dimensioning Sketches Overview Overview Overview Dimensioning your sketches is a major part of constraining the 2D geometry. you will be able to: • • • • • • Create various types of parametric dimensions Create and use driven dimensions on your sketch Use additional options when applying dimensions Create and apply dimensions to your sketch using the Automatic Dimensioning tool Use different formats when displaying dimensions on your sketch Understand best practices for dimensioning your sketch 114 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . In this lesson you learn how to create and use various types of dimensions on your 2D sketch geometry.

in a parametric 3D modeling application.Parametric Dimensions Adding parametric dimensions is the final step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. Procedure Unlike 2D CAD applications where dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of the geometry. the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension. Autodesk Inventor places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you select. When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch element. Several types of parametric dimensions are available but only one dimension tool is used to create them. Sketch Elements with Various Dimensions Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool: Standard Toolbar Keyboard Shortcut D The following image shows various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry. Inc. All Rights Reserved 115 . This technology enables you to quickly change a dimension and immediately see the effect the change has on the geometry. When placing dimensions. dimensions are used to drive the size of the geometry. the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing the dimension.

Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and follow the sequence below. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension c. b. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. On the Panel Bar.Applying Parametric Dimensions This section presents the processes for applying different types of parametric dimensions. Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and follow the sequence below. click the General Dimension tool. Radial/Diameter Dimension: a. On the Panel Bar.Process Overview . or continue placing additional dimensions. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. 116 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Linear Dimension: a. or continue placing additional dimensions. b. click the General Dimension tool. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension c.

On the Panel Bar. Position the cursor near the geometry. b. click the General Dimension tool. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension and follow the sequence below. All Rights Reserved 117 . Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Select the sketch each element for the angular dimension and follow the sequence below. c. Tip: You could also right-click before positioning the dimension and click Aligned on the shortcut menu to set the dimension type as an Aligned dimension. When creating an angular dimension select each line at a point on other than their endpoints. or continue placing additional dimensions. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension d. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Aligned Dimension: a.Angular Dimension: a. click the General Dimension tool. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. b. or continue placing additional dimensions. Click when the Aligned Dimension icon is displayed c. On the Panel Bar.

For example. you would enter 50 cm. the Edit Dimension dialog box will appear automatically after each dimension is placed. click Diameter or Radius to switch the default mode of the current dimension. • Display Edit Dimension dialog box automatically: While placing a dimension. • Radial/Diameter dimension options: When you place a dimension on a arc or circle. When dimensioning a circle. Autodesk Inventor evaluates the values as you enter them. click Edit Dimension. centimeter. • Linear dimension options: When you place a linear dimension to a line or 118 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the default unit. Values shown in red indicate an improper value or format. if the default unit of measurement is millimeters. When dimensioning an arc.Entering Values Autodesk Inventor understands specific units of measurement such as millimeter. it must be entered in lowercase. If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the non-default unit suffixes. while values shown in black are considered to be valid. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part. inch. With this option set. Additional Dimension Options The following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place dimensions. you would enter a value of 50 millimeters as 50 with no suffix. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. the default mode is Radius. the default mode is Diameter. meter. and foot. For example 50 cm would be evaluated correctly while 50 CM is not valid. Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive. When you enter a unit suffix.

its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used again in the current part file. place the cursor near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph. If you delete a dimension. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Selecting the Parameters tool will display the Parameters dialog box listing the Model Parameters. Dimensions Listed as Model Parameters Notice the parameter names d3. Dimensions Stored as Parameters Each dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 119 . • Dimensioning to quadrants: When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle. Inc. These names are automatically generated each time a dimension is placed. d4. d5 and so on. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in the Parameters dialog box. Select the arc or circle at the point where the glyph appears. click the desired dimension type.two points at an angle.

select Driven. However. Because driven dimensions do not force the geometry to change. from the Styles drop-down list. driven dimensions are driven by the geometry. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool and apply driven dimensions. The value of a driven dimension changes if the geometry it has been applied to changes. This option is available only if the General Dimension tool is active or one or more existing dimensions are currently selected. they do not remove any degrees of freedom from the sketch. when you create a driven dimension. you must set the dimension style to Driven. Standard Toolbar Keyboard Shortcut D Fully Constrained Sketch Containing a Driven Dimension 120 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Once all the degrees of freedom have been removed. On the Standard toolbar. Principle You create driven dimensions with the same dimension tool used for parametric dimensions. Each parametric dimension you apply reduces the degrees of freedom available on each sketch.Driven Dimensions As you apply dimensions to your sketch geometry. the sketch is considered fully constrained and you are not allowed to place any additional constraints or parametric dimensions. these dimensions will be parametric by default. Unlike parametric dimensions which force the geometry to change size based on the dimension value.

When you want to reference other dimensions in a new dimension. enabling you to control the display of the dimensions. if you attempt to apply a dimension that would overconstrain the sketch. Additional Options for Applying Dimensions When you apply dimensions to your sketch elements. additional options such as tolerances. Procedure Referencing Other Dimensions When you create a new dimension. you will be given the option to create the dimension as a driven dimension. with the Edit Dimension dialog box open.Automatic Driven Dimensions Note As you place dimensions on your sketch. Click Accept to create a driven dimension based on your selection. you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the dimension in the graphics window. The cursor Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The preceding image shows dimension d25 being created equal to dimension d24. Inc. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box. Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions. select an existing dimension to reference. All Rights Reserved 121 . are available.

The resulting value is placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box. This option appears only if User Parameters have been created. When you select the existing dimension. Select any value for use in the current dimension. Show Dimensions: Enables you to select a feature on the 3D part to display the underlying dimensions. 122 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . After the dimensions are displayed you can select a dimension for use in the existing dimension. Recently Used Values: Displays a list of recently used values. the parameter name of the dimension you selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box. List Parameters: Lists the current User Parameters in a window. Tolerance: Displays the Tolerance dialog box enabling you to assign a tolerance to the parametric dimension. enabling you to select a User Parameter for use in the current dimension. The dimension being referenced can be used alone or in a formula.changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing dimension. Edit Dimension Flyout Measure: Enables you to measure another sketch element or 3D feature.Flyout Options When applying parametric dimensions. the following options are available on the Edit Dimension flyout. Edit Dimension Dialog Box .

you should select the geometry based on how you want the automatic dimensions applied. Inc. Apply: Applies dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Auto Dimension tool. Remove: Removes the dimensions and/or constraints applied by the Auto Dimension tool. All Rights Reserved 123 . applies dimensions to the sketch elements. Dimensions Required: Displays the number of dimensions required to fully constrain the sketch. consider using at least one fix constraint or constrain the geometry to the origin of the sketch. Dimensions: When selected. Tip: When this number is 2. The Auto Dimension tool is intended to be used in conjunction with the General Dimension tool and manually added or inferred constraints. all elements are considered for dimensioning. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Although you can use the tool to dimension all sketch elements automatically by not selecting any elements and clicking the Apply button. If no sketch elements are selected. Constraints: When selected. applies constraints to the sketch elements.Automatic Dimensioning The Auto Dimension tool applies constraints and dimensions to the entire sketch or only those sketch elements that are selected. Standard Toolbar Auto Dimension Dialog Box The following options are available in the Auto Dimension dialog box: Curves: Select the sketch elements to be automatically dimensioned. This will not remove dimensions and/or constraints that you applied manually. Procedure For best results you should apply constraints and any dimensions you would prefer not be automatically calculated. Manually applied dimensions and/or constraints will affect this number.

This ensures that critical constraints do not need to be automatically calculated. 2. 1.Automatic Dimensioning The following steps represent an overview for using the Auto Dimension tool.Done: Closes the dialog box. Process Overview . Notice the constraints that have been added manually. click the Auto Dimension tool and select the geometry to be automatically dimensioned. Create a new sketch and add the constraints and dimensions that you prefer not be automatically calculated. 124 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . On the Panel Bar.

Click Done to close the dialog box. 5. All Rights Reserved 125 . Move the dimensions as required to clean up the automatic placement. Use standard dimension editing techniques to adjust the dimension values as required. click the Apply button to apply dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. 4.3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In the Auto Dimension dialog box. Inc.

126 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Procedure Dimension Display Options The following options are available on the Dimension Display submenu: Value: Dimension is displayed as nominal value. click Dimension Display.Displaying Dimensions You can control how dimensions are displayed in the graphics window by using different dimension display options. While in an active sketch. Expression: Dimension is displayed as an expression. Name: Dimension is displayed as a parameter name. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. You then select a dimension display option.

if two dimensions are supposed to be the same value. Precise Value: Dimension is displayed as precise value regardless of precision setting. With this relationship. • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. For example. place a perpendicular constraint instead of an angle dimension of 90 degrees. Use geometric constraints when possible. reference one dimension to the other. the other dimension changes as well. Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches Consider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch: Principle • • • • Use the General Dimension tool to place critical dimensions. Place large dimensions before small ones.Tolerance: Dimension is displayed with tolerance values. if the first dimension changes. Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent. Incorporate relationships between dimensions. For example. Inc. and then use the Auto Dimension tool to speed up the dimensioning process. All Rights Reserved 127 .

click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. you apply dimensions to a sketch. From the Main table of contents page. Using the techniques learned in this lesson.Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches In this exercise. 3D Part with Parametric Dimensions 128 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 2. click Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. apply a combination of parametric and driven dimensions to the sketch geometry.

and dimension a sketch as show here.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. All Rights Reserved 129 . 2. create. Inc. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. Fully Constrained and Dimensioned Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. constrain. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you create a new part file and using the techniques and concepts learned in this chapter.

How to create and edit 2D sketches. Fix common problems associated with sketches. How to constrain 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor. How to apply parametric dimension to 2D sketches. 130 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . How to use construction geometry when creating 2D sketches. About the types of constraints available and what types of geometry they can be applied to.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • Basic rules for creating sketches. How to display dimensions Guidelines and best practices for dimensioning sketches. What makes parametric and driven dimensions different.

. Sharing sketch geometry. . • • Create sketches and profiles for use in sketch features. Creating profiles containing multiple closed loops. Create revolved features using the Revolve tool. Create reference geometry from existing part geometry. Cut. Consumed and unconsumed sketches. Using the Extrude tool to create extruded features. Create extruded features using the Extrude tool. Using part faces to define a sketch Application options that enable you to automatically project edges on a new sketch. Specify termination options when you create extruded features. you will be able to. Base and secondary features. Use existing part faces to define new sketch planes.Creating Simple Sketched Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about... Edit revolved features.. and Intersect feature relationships. The Join. Creating sketch planes. Edit extruded features. • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Using the Revolve tool to create revolved features. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Sketched features. Use the Sketch tool to create new sketches. Specifying different termination options for extrude features Editing features after you have created them.

In this lesson you learn the concept of sketched features and how they are created. Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • Understand the concept of simple sketched features Identify consumed and unconsumed sketches in your model Identify the two different types of profiles and options for working with closed loop profiles Share sketch features 132 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . The term "sketched feature" refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch.Introduction to Sketched Features Overview Overview Overview Three-dimensional (3D) features that you create in Autodesk Inventor fall into one of two categories: sketched features or placed features.

As you add the additional sketched features. multiple sketches can be created and used within one sketch feature. The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry. All Rights Reserved 133 . Typical Sketched Feature Creation The image below represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features. The base sketch is created which is used to create the base feature. sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. Inc. For more complex sketched features. options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features will add or remove material from the existing 3D geometry. Used for both base and secondary features. When you create a sketched feature.Simple Sketched Features As the name implies. additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model. These features serve as the basis for most of your designs using Autodesk Inventor.Concept You create your 3D model by using multiple sketches representing various profiles of the 3D part and building on those sketches with sketch features. Creation of Sketched Features Sketched Feature Attributes The key attributes of sketched features are as follows: • • • Requires an unconsumed sketch. this profile usually represents a 2D section of the 3D feature being created. Secondary sketches and features are then added to the 3D model. Simple Sketched Features . The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature. After you create the base feature. For simple sketched features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you begin by first creating the sketch or profile for the 3D feature.

the sketch itself becomes consumed by the 3D sketched feature. Consumed Sketches 134 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . In the browser. such as Extrude or Revolve. After the sketch is created. Prior to this time. Unconsumed Sketch The image below shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature. the initial sketch is created for you automatically. When you create the 3D sketched feature. Unconsumed Sketch Consumed Sketches The following image shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. the sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used. to create 3D geometry from the initial sketch. the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used for any sketched feature.Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches When you create a new part. In most cases you use this default sketch for the basis of your 3D geometry. you create a sketched feature.

This option sets the visibility of the sketch to On. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you could change the direction of the current X or Y axes. Share Sketch: Shares the sketch making it available for additional sketch features. Edit Coordinate System: Activates the sketch enabling you to adjust the sketch coordinate system. In the browser. Any changes you make to the sketch are reflected in the 3D geometry. right-click on the sketch to access these options.Options for Consumed Sketches After the sketch has been consumed. For example. All Rights Reserved 135 . Redefine: Enables you to redefine the plane on which the sketch was created. Sketch Shortcut Menu The following options are available on the Sketch shortcut menu: Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch environment for editing. Inc. Any changes you make are reflected in the 3D geometry. or reposition the sketch origin. Create Note: Attaches a note to the sketch using the Engineer's Notebook interface. you still have access to the sketch for editing and other operations. its visibility is automatically turned off. Visibility: When a sketch is consumed by a feature.

Multiple Closed Loop Profiles In the following image. you may end up with multiple closed loop profiles. There are two different types of profiles: open and closed. you are able to select any individual closed profile or multiple closed profiles to be included in the feature. Closed profiles are the most common and are used to create 3D geometry. The closed profiles in some cases may intersect each other. In the bottom image. Sketch Containing Multiple Closed Loop Profiles 136 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Open profiles are used to create paths and surfaces and can also appear as the result of projecting reference geometry. a sketch containing multiple closed loop profiles is used to create an extruded feature. Concept As you build more complex sketches. In this situation you have one sketch containing multiple closed profiles. When you create sketched features from these types of profiles.Sketches and Profiles When you create sketches it is possible to create sketch geometry that contains multiple profiles. note the ability to select only the profiles you want included in the sketched feature.

sharing the sketch is an alternative to creating multiple sketches.Sharing Sketch Features You can reuse an existing sketch after it as been consumed by the sketched feature--this is referred to as sharing a sketch.Share Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you share the sketch its geometry becomes available for an unlimited number of additional sketched features. right-click on a consumed sketch and click Share Sketch. Shortcut Menu In the Browser.Procedure Under certain circumstances. If your sketch contains geometry that is meant to define separate features on the part. Sharing Sketch Features . you can share the sketch thereby making it available for additional sketched features. All Rights Reserved 137 . Access Methods Use the following method to share a sketch. Shortcut Menu . Inc.

After you share a sketch. Share with Caution! Tip Before you share a sketch.Shared Sketch • • • The hand indicates the sketch has been shared.The following image shows a sketch that has been shared and is being used in two sketched features. be certain this is the method you want to use to accomplish your design intent. 138 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . You must manually turn off visibility for a shared sketch. The icon is colored indicating that the sketch (and any dimensions added) will remain visible. even after being consumed by the sketched feature. there is no way to "un-share" or delete the shared sketch. Part/Assembly Browser .

click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 139 . You then share the sketch to make it available for additional features. you create some simple sketched features from a sketch consisting of multiple closed loop profiles. Inc.Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features In this exercise. click Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features 2.

and you learn about creating and referencing sketch geometry.Working with Sketch Planes Overview Overview Overview Every sketch you create defines a 2D plane on which your sketch geometry is created. In this lesson you learn how to work with sketch planes. you will be able to • • • • Use the Sketch tool to create new sketch planes Define a new sketch plane based upon an existing part face Reference existing model edge geometry when you create sketches Create reference geometry 140 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Completed Pillar Block Objectives After completing this lesson.

The existing sketch is activated for editing. • Activate an existing sketch On the Standard toolbar. When you select the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. click the Sketch tool and in the browser. All Rights Reserved 141 . You can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you are prompted to select a plane to create a sketch or an existing sketch to edit. select an existing sketch.The Sketch Tool You use the Sketch tool to create new sketches or to activate existing sketches. Procedure Standard Toolbar Using the Sketch Tool The following examples show potential uses of the Sketch tool. Inc.

click the Sketch tool and select a plane or face on the part. click the Sketch tool or On the Standard toolbar.• Create a new sketch On the Standard toolbar. A new sketch is created. • • • • To exit the sketch. Right-click in the graphics window and click Finish Sketch on the shortcut menu. click the Return button or. use one of the following methods: On the Standard toolbar. aligned to the selected face. 142 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

You can create new sketch planes on any flat surface of an existing part. the new sketch plane can be created directly on the selected face or offset from the selected face to a specified distance. Procedure Standard Toolbar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a part face and click New Sketch. The sketch plane is created on the selected face. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Creating Sketch Planes on a Part Face The following examples demonstrate how to create sketch planes on a part face. Using this method.Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch One of the most common methods for creating new sketches is to use a part face to define your sketch plane. • Create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face Right-click on a face of the part click New Sketch on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 143 .

offset from a selected face 1. An offset dialog box is displayed. enter a value for the offset and click the green checkmark.Click on the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face. 144 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .In the Offset dialog box. click the Sketch tool 2.• Create a new sketch plane. 3. The sketch plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified.On the Standard toolbar.

Direct Model Edge Referencing Direct model edge referencing refers to a process in which you reference existing model edge geometry in the creation of new sketch geometry. it would be otherwise impossible to dimension or constrain new sketch geometry to existing features on the 3D part. • Create a new sketch on an existing part face. the edges of the selected face are projected onto the new sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face. Options Dialog Box .Sketch Tab Referencing Model Edge Geometry The following examples demonstrate how to reference model edge geometry when creating new sketches. Procedure Uses for Direct Model Edge References Following are potential uses for edge references: • • • For dimensions to new sketch geometry For relational constraints to new sketch geometry As the basis for new sketched features Application Options . All Rights Reserved 145 . This geometry is known as reference geometry. When you create new sketch planes on existing model faces. Without this reference geometry. The edges of the existing part face Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Sketch Tab When you select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the Sketch tab in the Options dialog box. Inc. the edges of the selected face are automatically projected onto the new sketch.

Create new sketch geometry and use the projected reference geometry for dimensions and/or constraints. • • Direct model edge referencing in the context of an assembly: Create a new sketch on a face of the active part.are automatically projected onto the new sketch. This icon indicates the feature is adaptive to the referenced part in the assembly. If the source geometry projected onto the new sketch changes. click the Project Geometry tool and select a face on another part in the assembly. Note the appearance of the Adaptive indicator. On the Panel Bar. The new sketch geometry is created by projected the edges of the selected face. this feature will automatically update to reflect the changes. This concept is known as 146 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

To demonstrate Adaptivity. Inc.Adaptivity and is covered in greater detail later in this course. the source geometry on the first part in the assembly has been modified. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. As a result. the projected geometry updates to reflect the changes in the source part. All Rights Reserved 147 .

Creating Reference Geometry You cannot draw reference geometry. The only way to create it is by using the Project Geometry tool. If you project geometry from another part in the assembly. This option is found on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box. the reference geometry will also change. the reference geometry is still created. If the source geometry changes. As you select the geometry. however. Access Methods You can use the following tools to create reference geometry: Panel Bar Panel Bar Reference Geometry Attributes Following are some key attributes for reference geometry: • • • • • • Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry Cannot be dimensioned Cannot be trimmed Can be mirrored Cannot be drawn. it is not associative to the original source geometry. When you select this tool. it is projected onto the current sketch plane and is created as reference geometry. the geometry is associative only if the Cross Part Geometry Projection option is selected. Adaptivity is beyond the scope of this chapter but is covered in greater detail later in this course. If this option is not selected. it is always associative to the original source geometry. Procedure When you project geometry from the same part. you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the Autoproject Edges option 148 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

Application Options .Sketch Tab Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 149 . Application Options .Assembly Tab Application Options .Assembly Tab With the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling option selected on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box.Sketch Tab When the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected. projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly will create associative (adaptive) reference geometry. Inc. you can autoproject geometry by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching. Applications Options Dialog Box .

150 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .AutoProject Creating Reference Geometry . 2. Shortcut Menu .Sketching Shortcut Menu While sketching. Create a new sketch on the existing part. On the Panel Bar.Process Overview The following procedures represent an overview for creating reference geometry. click the Project Geometry tool and select the geometry to project onto the current sketch. 1. right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. This will enable you to hover over geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane.

To autoproject geometry during curve creation: 1. This will prevent the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features. Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. 3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 4. It will be automatically projected to the current sketch plane. Right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. Begin sketching the required geometry. Inc. Hover over the geometry to project. Continue sketching the required geometry as required. Create a new sketch on the existing part. 2. All Rights Reserved 151 .

you create several sketched features based upon different sketch planes. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference Note: Some 3D features are used in this exercise that will be covered in greater depth later in the course. Completed Pillar Block 152 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes 2. For each sketch you will be required to create reference geometry and use direct model edge referencing.

and Intersect options when you create extruded features Use the various termination options when you create extruded features Edit extruded features and the profiles used to create them Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. As you create these features you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join. Cut. you will be able to • • • • • Understand extruded features and how to create them Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features Understand the concept of using the Join. Inc. In this lesson you learn how to create extruded features using different termination options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them. you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the extruded feature.Creating Extruded Features Overview Overview Overview One of the most common sketched features is the extruded feature. Index Slide Objectives After completing this lesson. After the feature is created. and Intersect. Cut. All Rights Reserved 153 .

If the profile being extruded is open. If the profile being extruded is closed. Example of Extruded Feature 154 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Examples of Simple Extruded Profiles In this example.Overview of Extruded Features An extruded feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is extruded to a distance specified by a value or based upon different termination options. Procedure Although it is possible to taper the faces of the extruded feature. the extrusion direction is always perpendicular to the sketch profile being used. the extrusion will result in a surface. Example of Extruded Features In this example. the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature. you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature with holes.

Output: Specify the desired output option. extrude features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available.Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Extrude tool.The Extrude Tool You use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. Extrude Dialog Box The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the extrusion. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu The Extrude dialog box is opened when you start the Extrude tool. Considered a sketched feature. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If the sketch contains a single closed profile. you are required to select the profiles to be included in the extruded feature. that profile is selected automatically when you start the Extrude tool. If the sketch contains more than one profile. Solid or Surface. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion feature. Inc. Procedure Extrude Tool . All Rights Reserved 155 .

click the Extrude tool. 2. 156 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Adjust the options as required and click OK. The extruded feature is created. Creating Extruded Features . 1. Create a new sketch. 3. On the Panel Bar.Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the extrusion in the desired direction.Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for creating extruded features.

6. On the Panel Bar. click the Extrude tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 5. Create additional sketch geometry as required. Inc.4. Create additional sketch geometry. Adjust the options as required and click OK. All Rights Reserved 157 . The additional extruded feature is added to the part. 7.

click the Extrude tool. 9. The additional extruded feature is added to the part. On the Panel Bar. 158 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .8. Adjust the options as required and click OK.

All Rights Reserved 159 . Cut: This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created from the existing part. Cut. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.Feature Relationship Options Join: This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part.Feature Relationships . Note the green preview indicating material is being added. Concept The feature relationship options are available in the Extrude dialog box. These options are not available for the first feature of the part. and Intersect When you create extruded features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.Join. Dialog Box .

Specifying termination options enables you to control where the feature starts and ends. you can specify termination options for the feature in the Extrude dialog box. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship. 160 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Specifying Termination When you create extruded features.Termination Options Distance: This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified. Procedure Extrude Dialog Box .Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. different interface options are available. Depending on the option you choose.

From To: This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face selected in the From option and ending the extrusion at the second face selected. use the extend face options. To: This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face or plane. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the extrusion profile. If necessary. Use the Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the extrusion. Inc. select the extend face option to terminate the feature on the extended face.To Next: This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. All Rights Reserved 161 .

the extruded feature will continue to go all the way through the part.All: This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part. If the part changes. 162 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

feature relationships. When you edit an extruded feature. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry.Editing Features After you create an extruded feature. Feature Shortcut Menu Editing Extrude Features .Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for editing extruded features. and termination options and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level. In the Browser. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. Edit Sketch: Select this option to activate the sketch for editing. While editing the sketch. All Rights Reserved 163 . and add or remove geometry from the sketch. locate the feature you want to edit. you can change dimensions and constraints. 1. the shortcut menu is displayed. The following options are available on the Feature shortcut menu: Edit Feature: Select this option to open the Extrude dialog box. Because it is a sketched feature. All changes are reflected in the extruded feature. Procedure When you right-click on a feature. there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. To edit the sketch. you may be required to edit the extruded feature. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you are presented with the same dialog box that you used when you created the feature. When you edit the feature. Inc. you can edit it at any time. you are able to change the parameters such as distance.

2. click the Return button to exit the sketch. 4. 5. 3. In the Extrude dialog box. In the Browser. make the changes required to the sketch. 164 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. Using standard sketch tools. adjust the options as required to edit the feature and click OK. On the Standard toolbar.

click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features.Exercise: Creating Extruded Features In this exercise. Index Slide Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you will build an Index Slide part file using several extrude features. Some initial geometry has been created. Inc. click Exercise: Creating Extruded Features 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. while you will be required to create other sketch geometry. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 165 .

As you create these features. and Intersect options when you create revolved features Edit revolved features and the profiles used to create them 166 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the revolved feature. Cut. Indexer Part File Objectives After completing this lesson. you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join.Creating Revolved Features Overview Overview Overview You create revolved features by revolving a profile about an axis. and Intersect. you will be able to • • • • Understand revolved features and how to create them Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features Understand the concept of using the Join. Cut. After you create the feature. In this lesson you learn how to create revolved features using different feature relationship options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them.

The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship. Inc. the sketch contains a single closed loop profile. If the profile being extruded is open. Procedure Examples of Simple Revolved Profiles In this example. you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. When you start the Extrude tool. All Rights Reserved 167 . the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution.Overview of Revolved Features A revolved feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is revolved about an axis. You can revolve the profile at a full 360 degrees or at an angle specified. and one centerline. the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline. the extrusion results in a surface. Example of Revolved Feature Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If the profile being extruded is closed. Example of Revolved Features In this example. reference geometry.

Angle: This option enables you to specify an angle and direction for the revolution. you are required to select the profiles to be included in the feature. Extents: Select the desired option from the drop-down list. 168 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Axis: Click this icon to select the line segment to use as the axis for the revolve feature. Output: Select the desired output option: Solid or Surface. When you start the Revolve tool. The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. If the sketch contains a centerline. If the sketch contains more than one profile. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Revolve Dialog Box The following options are available in the Revolve dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the revolved feature. that profile is selected automatically. it will be selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature.Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Revolve tool. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the revolved feature.The Revolve Tool You use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. Procedure Revolve Tool . if the sketch contains a single closed profile. Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline it is selected automatically as the axis.

Process Overview The following steps present an overview for creating revolved features. This option is available only if the Extents option is set to Angle. 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Creating Revolved Features . All Rights Reserved 169 . If the profile is being revolved about a centerline. On the Panel Bar. adjust the options as required and click OK. Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the revolve in the desired direction.Full: This option revolves the profile 360 degrees. Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. In the Revolve dialog box. 2. click the Revolve tool. consider using the Centerline style on the line segment. Inc.

Create additional sketch geometry as required. On the Panel Bar. 170 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click the Revolve tool. Click OK. 4. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved feature and adjust the options as required.3.

All Rights Reserved 171 . Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Concept Revolve Dialog Box . Note the green preview indicating material is being added. Inc. The feature relationship options are Join. and Intersect.Feature Relationships . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and Intersect When you create revolved features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. Cut: This option cuts the result of the revolved feature being created from the existing part.Feature Relationship Options Join: This option joins the result of the revolved feature being created to existing part geometry. Cut. Cut. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. These options are not available for the first feature of the part.Join. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.

Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship.Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. 172 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

All changes will be reflected in the revolved feature. you can edit it at any time.Editing Features After the revolved feature is created. Feature Shortcut Menu Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Because it is a sketched feature. and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. Edit Feature: Displays the Revolve dialog box. you are presented with the same dialog box that was used when you created the feature. Inc. Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch for editing. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. Procedure The following options are available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on a revolved feature. there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. While editing the sketch. All Rights Reserved 173 . and even add or remove geometry from the sketch. When you edit a revolved feature. you can change dimensions and constraints. you are able to change the parameters such as angle and feature relationships. When you edit the feature. you may be required to edit the revolved feature.

On the Standard toolbar. 4.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for editing revolved features.Editing Revolve Features . make the changes required to the sketch. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. 3. In the Browser. 1. 174 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . In the Revolve dialog box. click Return to exit the sketch. right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. locate the feature you want to edit. 2. adjust the options as required and click OK. Using standard sketch tools. 5. In the Browser.

The origin Z axis is projected on the first sketch and changed to a centerline. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Creating Revolved Features 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features.Exercise: Creating Revolved Features In this exercise. Indexer Part File Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you create a simple Indexer part file using the Revolve tool. All Rights Reserved 175 . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. You use the Project Geometry and Project Cut Edges tools to create different profiles to be revolved.

click Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features 2. Rack Slide Dimensions 176 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Create a new part file and using the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter.ipt. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Name your part file Rack-Slide. From the Main table of contents page. you create a 3D Rack Slide part using the dimensions and geometry shown below. create a 3D model of the geometry described below. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features.

The effect of feature relationships on geometry when using the Revolve tool. The effect of feature relationships on geometry. Different ways to create reference geometry from existing part edges. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 177 . To create and edit revolve features using the Revolve tool. Inc.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • The concept of creating sketched features and sharing sketches. To create and edit extrude features using the Extrude tool. To use the Sketch tool to create new sketches. How to specify termination options when using the Extrude tool. How to identify consumed and unconsumed sketches. How to create new sketches on existing part faces.

178 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

Create work points. Create work axes. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Locating and utilizing the default work planes. . Different methods for defining work points Controlling the appearance of work points. In this chapter After completing this chapter. Locating and utilizing the default work axes Create work axes. Redefining a work axis after you have created it. Control the appearance of work features. Create work planes. Redefine work features.. Creating work points. Different methods for defining work axes.. Locating and utilizing the default work point. Controlling the appearance of work axes. Redefining a work point after you have created it..Introduction to Work Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Controlling the appearance of work planes Editing work planes.. you will be able to. • • • • • • Locate and utilize the default work features. Creating new work planes using several different methods.

placing constraints.Work Planes Overview Overview Overview Work planes are planes that extend infinitely. 180 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . and completing other modeling tasks. display and use the default work planes in part and assembly files How to use the Work Plane tool to create additional work planes Identify examples of work planes Control the visibility of work planes. There are two main types of work planes: default work planes and user-defined work planes. you will be able to • • • • Locate. Control Valve with Work Planes Objectives After completing this lesson. You can use them to assist in creating geometry. In this lesson you learn to create and use work planes.

Default Work Planes Potential Uses for Default Work Planes Following are some potential uses for default work planes: Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The three planes represented are the YZ plane.Default Work Planes Every part and assembly file contains default work planes. These work planes are located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. Inc. XZ plane. You can create additional sketches and/or features using the model or the default work planes. All Rights Reserved 181 . Concept When you create a new part file. the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes. The default work planes extend infinitely from the origin point. each representing a different coordinate plane. There are three default work planes. Browser Expand the Origin folder in the browser. Access Methods Use the following method to access the default work planes. and XY plane.

Right-click on the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work plane visibility.Appearance Properties The following options are available to control the appearances of work planes. select this option and clear the check mark. 182 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . To prevent the work plane from resizing. Auto-Resize: This property is on by default and enables the visible size of the work plane to adjust according to the geometry in the current file. The following image represents the work plane size before and after creating geometry. • • Visibility: This property is off by default. All work planes with this option enabled are resized equally.• • • • Basis for new sketches Basis for assembly constraints Feature termination options Basis for new work features Default Work Plane .

the work plane updates to maintain the 30 degree angle. All Rights Reserved 183 . Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut ] Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work planes. and circular feature changes with the work plane. For example. Inc. The circular extrusion is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. Work planes are used to define planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. the work plane is created at a 30 degree angle from part face. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry. and that radius later changes to 5 mm. Procedure In the image below. the work plane will move to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder.The Work Plane Tool You use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part or assembly file. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Plane tool. the work plane will also change. As the angle of the part face changes. if you create a work plane that is tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm. if the geometry changes.

Each selection represents either an orientation or position. you can activate the Repeat Command option. the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select. Process Overview . 1. 184 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . The Work Plane tool is repeated until you cancel the command. 2. For example.Repeating the Work Plane Tool If you need to create multiple work planes. there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. Select the feature or plane. The following steps represent an example for creating a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the outside of the cylinder.Creating Work Planes When you create work planes. All work planes are created based on two or three selections. While the Work Plane tool is active. Select the second feature or plane.

Redefining Work Planes As you create work planes. Any geometry that was based on the work plane being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work plane.The resulting work plane is created. If you right-click the work plane in the browser or graphics window. the Redefine Feature option is available. they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can select this option to recreate the work plane using any valid method. Inc. All Rights Reserved 185 . however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features.

Release the mouse and enter an offset distance Result Selection 1 .Click and drag from plane or surface 186 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Concept • Aligned to origin plane/tangent to cylindrical surface Selection 2 .Part Face • Offset from plane or surface Selection 2 .Cylindrical Surface Result Selection 1 .Origin Work Plane • Aligned to face/midpoint between two faces Selection 2 . Following are some of the most common methods used to create work planes. you select geometry and/or other work features. Each selection will define either orientation or position for the new work plane. When you create work planes.Part Face Result Selection 1 .Examples of Work Planes Several methods are available for creating work planes.

Part Face • Work plane on 3 points Selection 2 .Vertex on Geometry Selection 3 .Planar Surface on Part.Vertex on Geometry Result Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 187 . Enter Angle Result Selection 1 . Inc.• Angle from face/along an edge Selection 2 .Vertext on Geometry Selection 1 .

right-click the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu. Procedure Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu.Part Face Result Selection 1 . View Menu > Object Visibility Individual Work Plane Visibility To control individual work plane visibility. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts. You can control the visibility of the work planes and move and/or resize them. in the browser.Part Face Work Plane Appearance The appearance of work planes is controlled in a number of different ways.• Parallel to face/midpoint of edge Selection 2 . 188 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

Inc. All Rights Reserved 189 . click and drag the work plane to a new location. Resizing Work Planes Moving Work Planes Place your cursor over an edge of the work plane. click and drag the corner of the work plane to resize it.Resizing Work Planes Place your cursor over the corner of the work plane. When the resize indicator appears. Moving Work Planes Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When the move indicator appears.

you create a cylindrical control valve using both origin planes and work planes. click Exercise: Work Planes The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Control Valve with Work Planes 190 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Work Planes In this exercise. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. 2.

Simple Part Created Using Work Axes Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn to create and use work axes. you will be able to • • • • Locate. There are two main types of work axes: default work axes and user-defined work axes. and completing other modeling tasks. display and use the default work axes in part and assembly files Create additional work axes using the Work Axis tool Identify examples of work axes Control the visibility of work axes Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. placing constraints.Work Axes Overview Overview Overview A work axis is an axis that extends infinitely and is used to assist you in creating geometry. All Rights Reserved 191 . Inc.

The three axes represented are the X axis. and Z axis. located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. each representing a different coordinate axis. These default work axes. There are three default work axes. Y axis. Browser Expand the Origin folder and right-click on one of the default work axes.Default Work Axes Every part and assembly file contains default work axes. Concept Access Methods Use the following methods to access the default work axes. extend infinitely from the origin point. Default Work Axes 192 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

Appearance Properties Right-click on an origin axis to access the following options. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Right-click on the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work axis visibility.Potential Uses for Default Work Axes Following are some potential uses for default work axes: • • • • Basis for assembly constraints Axis of revolution for circular pattern Basis for new work features Representation of centerlines on sketches Default Work Axes . All Rights Reserved 193 . • Visibility: This property is off by default.

Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Axis tool. if the geometry changes. 194 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Creating Work Axes When you create a work axis. you can activate the Repeat Command option. When you create a work axis using features of existing geometry. the work axis updates to reflect those changes. Work axes are used to define an axis when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. All work axes are created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. While the Work Axis tool is active. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut / Repeating the Work Axis Tool If you need to create multiple work axes. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select. For example.The Work Axis Tool The Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part or assembly file. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work axis. The Work Axis tool is repeated until you cancel the command. Work axes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. Process Overview .

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. • Select another Plane or Planar Surface. All Rights Reserved 195 .• Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: • • Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes: On the Panel Bar. click the Work Axis tool and select a Plane or Planar Surface. • The work axis is created at the intersection of the two planes.

they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. the Redefine Feature option is available. 196 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . If you rightclick on the work axis in the browser or graphics window.Redefining Work Axis As you create work axes. however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. Select this option to recreate the work axis using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work axis being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work axis.

Example of Work Axes Concept Process Overview .Plane or Planar Surface Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Circular Feature Result • Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes: Selection 2 .Creating Work Axes Several methods are available for creating work axes. Inc.Plane or Planar Surface Result Selection 1 . When you create work axes. • Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: Selection 1 . you select geometry and/or other work features. All Rights Reserved 197 . Following are some of the most common methods used to create work axes.

• Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane: Selection 2 .Plane or Planar Surface • Work Axis Through Two Points: Selection 2 .Point Result Selection 1 .Point or Midpoint 198 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Point or Midpoint Result Selection 1 .

in the browser. Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. right-click the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. View Menu > Object Visibility Individual Work Axis Visibility To control individual work axis visibility.Work Axis Appearance Procedure Work Axis Appearance You can turn on or off the appearance of work axes individually or globally in the part or assembly file. Inc. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts. All Rights Reserved 199 .

Simple Part Created Using Work Axes 200 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Exercise: Work Axes In this exercise. You will utilize both origin work axes as well as new work axes to create the additional features required for the part. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2. From the Main table of contents page. you use work axes to add features to an existing part. click Exercise: Work Axes The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

PC Speaker Base Component Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn how to create and use both grounded and parametric work points.Work Points Overview Overview Overview Work points are used to represent a single point on the geometry or in space.0 coordinate. Each part and assembly file contains one center point work point representing the 0. you will be able to • • • • Utilize the Center Point work point when creating geometry Create parametric work points Create grounded work points Identify methods used to create work points Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 201 . You can create other work points that are parametrically attached to the geometry or grounded to a location specified. Inc.0.

The Center Point work point appears at the bottom of the list. Concept In this lesson you learn how to access and use the Center Point work point in your designs. By default. Work planes and work axes extend outward from this point.0 coordinate. Isometric View of Origin Axes and Center Point Identifying the Center Point Work Point Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin work features. this point represents the 0. Right-click on the center point and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to display the center point. visibility for the center point is turned off. Center Point Work Point 202 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Located under the Origin folder in the Part/Assembly browser.0.Center Point Work Point Each part and assembly file contains a Center Point work point.

2. click the Project Geometry tool and in the browser. expand the Origin folder and select the Center Point. The default sketch is automatically created. Now that the center point is projected onto the sketch. you can create your initial sketch geometry relative to its position. On the Panel Bar.Initial Use for Center Point Work Point It is recommended that all designs initially reference the Center Point work point by constraints or dimensions. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Create a new part file. The following steps describe how to reference the Center Point work point in your design. Inc. 1. All Rights Reserved 203 .

This insures that when the dimensions change. in the browser. Center Point Visibility Note You do not need to turn on the visibility of the center point to reference it in your design features. the geometry is still centered around the projected center point. Next add constraints and/or dimension referencing the center point work point. After changing the dimensions on the sketch. the sketch geometry stays in the same position relative the origin center point. expand the Origin folder and select it. 204 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .3. This technique also positions your geometry relative to the other origin work planes and axes for later use. To project the center point.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The Work Point tool will be repeated until you cancel the command. Inc. If this geometry changes. All Rights Reserved 205 . While the Work Point tool is active. Procedure Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and features. the work point changes accordingly. Either method creates a work point that is parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features.The Work Point Tool You use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features. Potential Uses for Work Points Following are some potential uses for work points: • • • • Basis for assembly constraints Projection onto sketches Basis for new work features Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Point tool. you can activate the Repeat Command option. Repeating the Work Point Tool If you need to create multiple work points. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut . Several methods are available for creating these work points. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu.

click the Work Point tool and select the of an edge 206 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . The work point position is determined by the geometry or other work features that are selected. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work points.Process Overview .Creating Work Points Several methods are available for creating work points. • Creating a work point on a vertex The work point is created on the selected vertex On the Panel Bar. click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part • Creating a work point the midpoint of an edge The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge On the Panel Bar.

they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 207 . however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features.• Creating a work point at the intersection of a edge and plane Select a plane or surface The work point is created at the intersection of the edge and plane On the Panel Bar. If you right-click on the work point in the browser or graphics window. Any geometry that was based on the work point being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work point. click the Work Point tool and select an edge or axis Redefining Work Points As you create work points. Selecting this option enables you to recreate the work point using any valid method. the Redefine Feature option is available. Inc.

however after the initial placement is selected. 3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box 208 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Unlike standard work points which update their position to reflect changes in model geometry. the work point can be moved and/or rotated in any direction. The interface in the dialog box changes depending on which type of transformation you are doing on the grounded work point. 3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box After you select the initial location for the grounded work point.Grounded Work Points Unlike standard work points which must be placed somewhere on the geometry or at an intersection of geometry and/work features. Procedure After the grounded work points position has been set. you are presented with the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Grounded Work Point tool. grounded work points remain in their set position until manually moved. Grounded work points differ from standard work points in that they are not parametrically attached to the model geometry. and can be used in the same way as a standard work point. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut . it appears in the graphics window the same as a standard work point. When you execute the Grounded Work Point tool. grounded work points can be placed anywhere in 3D space. you must select existing geometry for the initial placement.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating grounded work points. the dialog box changes to enable you to input or drag an angle value. the fields available in the dialog box are based on the triad element selected.The image above describes the transformation options when moving a grounded work point. On the Panel Bar. The work point triad appears at the selected location. Grounded Work Points . When you select a Triad element for a move transformation. All Rights Reserved 209 . Inc. click the Grounded Work Point tool and select a vertex or other work point to define the initial position. you must select an element of the triad according to the Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you select an axis element on the Triad. To transform the grounded work point. 2. 1.

Select the More tab to see additional options. 3. The previous steps results in the triad being aligned to the selected edge. In this image. 210 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Select the Redefine Alignment or Position option to realign the triad. and then the angled edge on the part is selected. the triad Y Axis is selected.transformation desired.

note the slightly different icon for grounded work points in the browser. the triad Y axis arrow element is selected enabling you to move the work point along the Y axis by entering a value or clicking and dragging the distance in the graphics window. Inc. The work point is displayed in the graphics window just like a standard work point. However. All Rights Reserved 211 . 5. In this image.4. Click Apply or OK to create the work point at the current location. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Moving and Rotating Grounded Work Points . Redefining a work point is the same as redefining other work features. in the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box select the More tab and then select the Move Triad Only option. To move the triad only. the triad is being relocated to the center of the part.Process Overview After you create the grounded work point. 212 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . In the browser. 2. This would enable you to move or rotate the grounded work point from the new location. where a standard work point exists. right-click on the grounded work point and click 3D Move/Rotate on the shortcut menu. Select the Redefine alignment or position option and select an element of the triad. In the image below. you have options to redefine or move/rotate the work point. enabling you to transform the work point from a point other than its current position. The following steps represent an overview for using the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box to transform an existing grounded work point. 1.

Inc. Clear the Move Triad Only option and click the Transform tab. All Rights Reserved 213 .3. Click Apply or OK to position the grounded work point at the current location. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Select an axis element on the triad and enter or drag and angle of rotation.

Concept • Work point at the intersection of a line or axis and a surface: Selection 2 .Plane or Face 214 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Curve Result Selection 1 .Surface Result Selection 1 .Additional Examples of Work Points Following are some additional methods for creating work points.Line or Axis • Work point at the intersection of a plane and a curve: Selection 2 .

2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. the sketch geometry has already been created. Inc. PC Speaker Base Component Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Work Points The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 215 .Exercise: Work Points In this exercise. you create a PC speaker base component by using sketched features and work points. To save time. From the Main table of contents page.

sketched features. You create different types of work features. 2.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise you create the Offset-Rod-Guide part by using the concepts and procedures you learned in this chapter. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. From the Main table of contents page. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Offset-Rod-Guide 216 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . and hole features. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

How to create new work planes using different methods to define them. Inc.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • How to locate and utilize the default work planes contained in every part and assembly file. How to use the default work axes as well as create new work axes. Y How to redefine and control the appearance of work axes in your model. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to create new work points. How to control the appearance of work planes in your part and assembly files. How to redefine and control the appearance of work points in your model. How to use the default center point work point. All Rights Reserved 217 . both parametric and grounded.

218 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

. Different types of fillets that can be created. Create and edit hole and thread features. Use the options contained in the Shell dialog box. • • • • • ... Create and edit thread features on your part by using the Thread tool. Create and edit rectangular and circular patterns.. Use the three available methods for creating chamfer features. Create and edit chamfer features. The three different methods for defining chamfer features. Creating Shell features to remove material from your part model.Introduction to Placed Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Using the Hole and Thread tools. Adding Face Drafts to a model. Representing external and/or internal threads on a part. you will be able to. Creating and editing chamfer features. Create and use custom color styles on a part model. Apply face drafts to a part model by using the Face Draft tool. Applying custom color styles to a part model. • • Create and edit fillet features. Creating rectangular and circular patterns of features on your part. Use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet is created. Create and edit shell features to remove material from a part. • • • • • • • • • • • Creating and editing Fillet features. Setting the draft angle and pull direction.

Pillar Block with Fillets Objectives After completing this lesson. however certain situations may call for the use of variable radius fillets. They can exist on geometry in various sizes and shapes. The most common type of fillet feature is a constant radius fillet. and also for aesthetic purposes. Fillets are commonly used when parts are designed to remove sharp edges and reduce the potential of stress cracking.Fillet Features Overview Overview Overview Fillet features are among the most widely used features on any three-dimensional (3D) part. In this lesson you learn how to create both constant and variable radius fillets. you will be able to • Use the Fillet tool to create constant and variable radius fillets 220 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Constant Tab Edge Sets: An edge set consists of selected edges and a radius value. Edges: Displays the number of edges selected for this edge set. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+F Constant Radius Tab Fillet Dialog Box .The Fillet Tool You use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry. Inc. All Rights Reserved 221 . The arrow icon indicates you are in the selection mode and can continue to select the required edges. Procedure Before and After Fillet Features Access Methods You can use the following methods to access the Fillet tool. You can create both constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool.

You cannot select additional edges until you select the edges field of the edge set. • Feature: Enables you to select or remove all edges of a feature at once. To remove selected edges from the edge set.Radius: Specify a value for the radius of the fillet for each edge set. Select mode area: Determines how edges are selected. • Edge: Enables you to select or remove individual edges for the fillet. 222 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . select the edges to be removed. Although each edge set can have a different radius value. Click to add: Select this area of the dialog box to create a new edge set. Each edge set consist of selected edges and a specific radius. then while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key. they are all treated as one fillet feature. select the appropriate edge set in the dialog box. The pencil icon indicates that the radius value is being edited. • Loop: Enables you to select or remove the edges of a closed loop on a face.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Only one edge is allowed per selection. Use the Click to Add area for additional edges. If some edges have already been selected. a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. All Rights Reserved 223 .Variable Tab Edges: Select the edge to place a variable radius fillet. Inc. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Rounds edge set. All Rounds: Select this option to automatically select all convex edges and corners.All Fillets: Select this option to automatically select all concave edges and corners. a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. Variable Radius Tab Fillet Dialog Box . The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Fillets edge set. If some edges are already selected.

25 represents a distance 25% of the length of the edge from the start point. Position: Specify a position along the selected edge for the selected point. The point selected in the dialog box is highlighted on the edge. Radius: Enter a radius value for the selected point. . Clear this option to create fillets with a linear transition between the points. On Off 224 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Smooth radius transition: Select this option to gradually blend the radius between points. Select additional points along the edge for more control over the variable radius. Values represent the percentage from the start point.Point: List the start point and endpoint of the selected edge. For example.

The value specified represents a distance along the selected edge from the vertex. When you create fillets on three edges that meet at a vertex. Not Using Setbacks Using Setbacks Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The following images represent the result of using the Setbacks tab. Inc. Edge/Setback: Select each edge and specify a setback value for the edge. using the Setbacks tab is optional.Setbacks Tab Vertex: Select the vertex of three selected edges. All Rights Reserved 225 .Setbacks Tab Fillet Dialog Box .

Expanded Roll along sharp edges: This option sets the solution method for the fillet when conditions would cause adjacent edges to be extended in order to maintain the radius. Fillet Dialog Box . click the [>>] button to expand the Fillet dialog box. 226 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Rolling ball where possible: This option sets the corner style for the fillets.Options To access the following options. the fillet radius remains constant and adjacent edges are extended as required to maintain the radius. If this option is selected. If this option is not selected. the fillet radius varies when necessary to preserve the adjacent faces.Fillet Dialog Box .

two edge sets have been created. the cut feature would intersect the fillet feature. On the Panel Bar. Preserve All Features: When this option is selected. all edges tangent to the selected edge are selected automatically. Create an edge set for each different radius. The first edge set contains two edges to receive a 2 mm fillet and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet. Feature Intersecting Fillet Creating Constant Radius Fillets . Inc. features that intersect with the fillet are not calculated.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating constant radius fillet features. An error results when creating the fillet feature. Editing the fillet feature and enabling the Preserve All Features option fixes the problem and the fillet and cut features remain valid. features that intersect the fillet feature are checked and their intersections are calculated. Only the selected edge is calculated during the fillet operation. In the image below. in the graphics window. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 227 . 1. In the following images. select the edges to be filleted and specify a radius for each edge set. click the Fillet tool. 2. With the Fillet dialog box displayed.Automatic Edge Chain: When this option is selected. If this option is not selected.

3.

Click OK to create the fillet feature. Note in the browser only one fillet feature appears even though five edges were filleted in this example.

Creating Variable Radius Fillets - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for creating variable radius fillet features. 1. 2. On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, select the Variable tab, and in the graphics window, select the edge(s) to apply the variable radius fillet. In the Fillet dialog box, click the Start point to modify and in the Radius field enter the radius for the Start point then click the End point to modify the radius End point.

228

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

3.

To add an additional point along the selected edge, drag the cursor along the selected edge and left click to add the point.

4.

After the additional point(s) is added, in the Radius box specify a radius for the fillet at the selected point and in the Position box specify a position along the edge for the new point.

5.

Click OK to create the fillet.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

229

Editing Fillet Features
After you have created a Fillet feature, you can edit it using the same dialog box. In the browser, right-click the Fillet feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Fillet dialog box is displayed enabling you to change the fillet parameters, add or remove selections, and change options.

230

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

Exercise: Fillet Features
In this exercise, you create fillet features on the existing Pillar-Block-Rev-2 component. You will create both constant and variable radius fillets.
Print Exercise Reference

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:
1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Fillet Features

2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Pillar Block with Fillets

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

231

Chamfer Features
Overview Overview

Overview
You can place chamfer features on parts to serve different purposes from functional to aesthetic. Chamfers can exist on parts in various sizes and angles. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit chamfer features.

Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to • Use the Chamfer tool to create and edit chamfers

232

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

The Chamfer Tool
You use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified. With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances.
Procedure

Before and After Chamfer Features

Access Methods
Use the following methods to access the Chamfer tool. Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut

SHIFT+K

When you use any of the above listed methods to access the Chamfer tool, the following options are available. There are three methods for creating chamfers, Single Distance, Distance/Angle, and Distance/Distance. Each method presents different options in the Chamfer dialog box.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Single Distance Option

Edges: Select the edges to be chamfered

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

233

Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both sides of the selected edge resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Angle Option

Edges: Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This option is disabled until you select a face. The edge(s) selected must be adjacent to the selected face. Face: Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is measured from this face. Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is measured from the selected edge along the selected face. Angle: Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the selected face.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Distance Option

Edge: Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only one edge can be chamfered at a time. Click this button to flip the sides of the selected edge for calculating Distance1 and Distance2. Distance1: Specify the first distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along one of the adjacent faces. Distance2: Specify the second distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along the opposite adjacent face.

234

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

You can expand the Chamfer dialog box by clicking the [>>] button. Expanding the Chamfer dialog box presents the following options.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Expanded Area

Edge Chain: The options control how the edges are selected. The edge selected and all tangentially connected edges. Only the edge selected. Setback: This option is available only when using the single distance method. When chamfering three edges that meet at a corner, this option determines the result of the corner.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

235

Creating and Editing Chamfer Features - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing chamfer features. 1. 2. On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the desired method to create the chamfer. • For a single distance chamfer, select the edge(s) to be chamfered, enter a distance for the chamfer and click OK.

The resulting chamfer is created

236

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

For the Distance/Angle method, select the Distance/Angle option. Select the face, and then select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance and angle for the chamfer and click OK.

The resulting chamfer is created

For the Distance/Distance method, select the Distance/Distance option. Select the edge to be chamfered. Enter distance values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields.

Optionally flip the direction of the chamfer by clicking the Flip Direction icon.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

237

The Chamfer dialog box is displayed enabling you to edit the feature the same way it was created. The resulting chamfer is created. Right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. Editing Chamfer Features After the chamfer feature is created. it will appear in the browser.Click OK to create the chamfer. 238 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 239 . you will add chamfer features to an existing part. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features.Exercise: Chamfer Features In this exercise. Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. After the features have been created. you will edit the chamfer features and view the result. click Exercise: Chamfer Features 2. Inc.

Hole and Thread Features Overview Overview Overview Hole features enable you to create parametric holes on your part. In this lesson you learn how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and how to use the Thread tool to create parametric thread features on existing geometry. Hydraulic Valve Component Objectives After completing this lesson. Although Hole features are considered to be placed features. You use the Thread tool to place both internal and external thread features on the part. they do require an unconsumed sketch representing the center point locations for the holes. you will be able to • • Use the Hole tool to create and edit hole features Use the Hole tool to create internal thread features and use the Thread tool to create external thread features 240 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

You can create standard drilled holes. such as counterbore. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Keyboard Shortcut H Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 241 . Additional options for the drill point and thread options are also available. rather than having to manually edit or create geometry to achieve the same result. You can create center points using the Point/Hole Center sketch tool. the endpoints of sketched lines. the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in the variations and types of holes. Although you can create holes by extruding a circle with a Cut feature relationship. Part with Various Types of Holes Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole tool.The Hole Tool You use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features on parts. With the Hole tool you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box. Inc. When you start the Hole tool. countersink. and threads. and countersunk holes. Procedure When you create holes using the Hole tool. or points projected from other geometry in the part. you must create a sketch containing the hole center points. counterbored holes. you are presented with different options for the type of hole being created.

select the thread type. projected centerpoints of circles and arcs. and countersink. • Optionally specify an angle other than the standard 118-degree drill point. the center points will be selected automatically. Click this button to flip the direction of the hole. Type: Click the button representing the desired hole type: drilled. and projected work points. counterbore. Through All: This option enables the hole to go all the way through the part. Thread Type: From the drop-down list. If you create the sketch using the Point/Hole Center objects.Expanded The Holes dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Centers: Select the center points to use for the hole(s). Termination: Select one of the following Termination types: • • • Distance: This option enables you to specify a depth for the hole in the preview area of the dialog box. Tapped: This option enables tapped threads in the hole and expands the Hole dialog box.Holes Dialog Box . To: This option enables you to specify a face or plane to terminate the hole. Drill Point: Select either a flat bottom drill or standard tapered drill point. You can also clear hole centers from the selection set by holding the CTRL key and selecting the center points. Other acceptable points include endpoints of lines. 242 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

1. Major: Creates the hole using the Major Diameter of the selected thread size.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing holes. All Rights Reserved 243 . Pitch: Creates the hole using the Pitch diameter of the selected thread size. select the nominal hole size. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Left Hand: Select this option for a left-hand thread. click Return to exit the sketch. select the Class of thread. Nominal Size: From the drop-down list. Create a new sketch containing the center point location for the hole features. Right Hand: Select this option for a right-hand thread. If this option is not selected. On the Standard toolbar. you must specify a thread depth in the preview area of the dialog box. Creating and Editing Holes . Diameter: Select the actual diameter used to create the hole. Inc. Available pitches are based on the selected Nominal Size. select the thread pitch. • • • • Minor: Creates the hole using the Minor Diameter of the selected thread size. Tap Drill: Creates the hole using the Tap Drill diameter of the selected thread size.Full Depth: This option creates the threads at the full depth of the hole. Pitch: From the drop-down list. 2. Class: From the drop-down list.

244 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .3. On the Standard toolbar. click the Hole tool. 4. Remember. Click OK to create the hole(s). On the Panel Bar. the endpoints of lines can be used to locate hole features. click Return to exit the sketch. Adjust the options in the dialog box depending on the type of hole(s) you need to create. the hole centers will be automatically selected. If you use the Point/Hole Center sketch object. In some situations it may be easier to draw construction line segments to locate the center points of the holes.

On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. set the Diameter option to Major. All Rights Reserved 245 . In the image below the endpoints are being selected and the Tapped option is being used. Fine threads will appear fine while coarse threads appear coarse. click the Hole tool and then select the endpoints of the line segments. Click OK to create the threaded hole. Select the Thread type from the drop-down list and adjust the other thread options as required. Note the bitmap representing a threaded hole. Inc. thus preventing an interference being returned between the fastener and the hole. Preventing Interference Between Holes and Fasteners Tip In the Threads area. Left-hand versus right-hand threads are also depicted correctly. This creates the hole at the major diameter of the thread. The bitmap will change according to the thread specification.5.

Panel Bar Thread Feature Dialog Box . All that is required is existing cylindrical surfaces to apply the thread feature. Procedure Example of External Thread Features Access Methods Use the following method to access the Thread tool.Thread Features The Thread tool enables you to create thread features on external and internal surfaces. Threads are considered a placed feature. 246 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Many of the same options available for internal threads using the Hole tool are also available when you use the Thread tool. therefore. the Thread tool does not require an unconsumed sketch.Location Tab The Location tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Face: Click the icon to select the face(s) to apply thread features.

Full Length: Select this option to apply the thread feature to the entire length of the selected face. When this option is not selected. If this option is not selected. the following options become available. Click this button to flip the direction of the thread feature.Display in Model: Select this option to display the thread bitmaps on the model. Pitch: Select the appropriate thread pitch from the drop-down list. Right Hand: Select this option to generate a right hand thread. All Rights Reserved 247 . Left Hand: Select this option to generate a left hand thread. Nominal Size: The nominal thread size is automatically selected based upon the diameter of the selected face.Specification Tab The Specification tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Thread Type: Select the required thread type. • Length: Specifies the length of the thread feature on the selected face. • Offset: Specifies the distance from the start face of the thread feature. Class: Select the appropriate thread class from the drop-down list. Selecting a nominal size other than the size automatically selected may result in an error when you click OK. the thread feature is created but is not displayed on the geometry. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Thread Feature Dialog Box .

2. Click OK to create the thread feature. select the appropriate thread type and adjust the other settings as required by your design intent. Just like other parametric features. 1. 248 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . adjust the Thread Length options as required. On the Specification tab. click the Thread tool and select a cylindrical face on the part. On the Location tab. The thread feature appears on the model geometry as well as in the browser.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating external thread features using the Thread tool. you can right-click the thread feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu to edit the feature using the same dialog box used in creating the feature.Creating Thread Features . On the Panel Bar.

All Rights Reserved 249 . click Exercise: Hole and Thread Features 2. You will use the Hole tool to add the necessary hole features. From the Main table of contents page. you open the Hyd-Valve-Housing part file and create new hole features. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Hydraulic Valve Component Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: Hole and Thread Features In this exercise. Inc. You then use the Thread tool to add thread features to the component. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

Complete Part Containing Shell Features Objectives After completing this lesson. you can create the overall shape of your part and then create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. you will be able to: • Use the Shell tool to create shelled features 250 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .Shell Features Overview Overview Overview You use shell features to remove material from existing solid features. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit shell features. By using shell features.

All Rights Reserved 251 . Generally. you can remove material from an existing part and create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. One key advantage to using the Shell tool is that you can create differing wall thickness for each face of the part. Panel Bar Shell Dialog Box Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure Before and After Shell Feature Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Shell tool. you select at least one face on the part to be removed from the shell feature leaving the remaining faces as the shell walls. Inc. With the Shell tool.The Shell Tool You use the Shell tool to create shelled features on existing solid geometry.

The remaining faces serve as walls for the shell feature. Direction: Click one of the direction buttons. it will result in a cavity in the part with no open faces.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating shell features. • Both: Half of the thickness is applied to each side of the face. Unique face thickness: Select the Click to Add area of the dialog box to create unique face thicknesses for the shell feature. • Inside: The thickness is applied to the inside of the existing faces. In the Thickness box enter a wall thickness.Remove Faces: Click this icon to select the face(s) to remove from the shell feature. • Outside: The thickness is applied to the outside of the existing faces. Select the face(s) and specify a unique wall thickness for the face. 252 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Thickness: Specify value for the wall thickness. click the Shell tool and select the faces to remove from the shell operation. 2. 1. On the Panel bar. This value overrides the default thickness for the selected face(s) only. Create a part representing the overall shape required. If you do not remove any faces from the shell feature. Creating Shell Features .

specify a thickness for the selected face(s). Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.3. Inc. Under Unique Face Thickness. To assign unique wall thicknesses. click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and select the Click to Add area and select the face(s) to assign a unique wall thickness. All Rights Reserved 253 . The shell feature is created. Click OK to create the shell feature.

Exercise: Shell Features In this exercise. click Exercise: Shell Features 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you will create a shell feature for the part. You will then edit the shell feature to include unique wall thicknesses on different features. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. Complete Part Containing Shell Features 254 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . applying a common wall thickness to all faces.

Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features Objectives After completing this lesson.Pattern Features Overview Overview Overview Pattern features are used to parametrically duplicate selected features. There are two types of patterns: Rectangular and Circular. If the original feature changes. Each type offers different options for creating the pattern. Inc. you will be able to • • Create and edit rectangular patterns Create and edit circular patterns Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the patterned features update to reflect those changes. All Rights Reserved 255 . you are creating parametric copies of that feature. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit Rectangular and Circular Pattern features. When you pattern a feature.

so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences. Procedure When you create these patterns.The Rectangular Pattern Tool You use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern. with options to control feature spacing. they are associative to the original feature. There are several options to control how the feature(s) will be patterned. You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+R 256 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Example of Rectangular Patterns Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Rectangular Pattern tool.

Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. Direction 2: This column is optional and contains the same options as Direction 1. Pattern can start at any selected point. Use the Flip Direction button to flip the path direction.Expanded The Rectangular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. Distance: Distance value represents the total pattern distance. Inc. Direction 1: Path: Select the path for Direction 1. Curve Length: Disables the Distance field and divides the curve length by the number of occurrences. Enter a value for the pattern distance. Start: Sets the start point for the first occurrence. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list: Spacing: Distance value represents the spacing between each occurrence. This can be the edge of a part or a 2D sketch representing the path for the pattern. This value represents either total distance of the pattern or spacing between each feature.Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box . This number includes the original feature. All Rights Reserved 257 .

This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Identical: Occurrence orientation is identical to the first feature.Termination Method: Identical: This is the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. you immediately see the difference. you will find any sketches used as a path. the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. This option is not available on the first occurrence. Using this method. each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. Orientation Method: These options control the orientation of the patterned features. Adjust to Direction 1 or Direction 2: Occurrences will be rotated as the path changes directions. Located under the pattern feature. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern. 258 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence.

Optionally include information for Direction 2 and click OK.Creating Rectangular Patterns . click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. To create a pattern along a path. 2. Enter the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the Spacing method accordingly. On the Panel Bar. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select a path. click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned. Optionally provide information for Direction 2. Inc. All Rights Reserved 259 . distance. On the Panel Bar. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select the path for the pattern. Create a part with a feature(s) to be patterned. create a 2D sketch containing the path for the pattern.Process Overview The following steps can be used to create a rectangular pattern. 4. Adjust the number of occurrence. 1. or origin axis for the pattern. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3. and spacing options as required and click OK. part edge.

they are associative to the original feature. When you create these patterns. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+O 260 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences. Procedure When you start the Circular Pattern tool. There are also options for controlling the creation method and positioning method. You then select a rotation axis which serves as the center of the pattern. you must first select a feature to pattern. Next you set the pattern properties such as number of occurrences and angle.The Circular Pattern Tool You use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. Example of a Circular Pattern Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Circular Pattern tool.

: Specify the angle for the pattern. work axes. or part edges. Inc. : Flips the rotational direction of the pattern. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This number includes the original feature.Circular Pattern Dialog Box . Using this method. Rotation Axis: Select the rotation axis for the pattern. Creation Method: Identical: This the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns.Expanded The Circular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. The result of this angle is based on the Positioning Method chosen. Positioning Method: Incremental: Sets the angle value to represent the angle between occurrences. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Valid selections include circular faces. Placement: : Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern. Fitted: Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational angle of the pattern. each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. All Rights Reserved 261 .

If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern. the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. Located under the pattern feature. This option is not available on the first occurrence. along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. 262 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. you immediately see the difference. you will find any sketches used as a path. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created. Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence.Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns.

Optionally click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and adjust the options as required. Create a part containing the feature(s) to be patterned. Inc. 1. Click OK to create the pattern. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3.Creating Circular Patterns . Then click the Rotation Axis icon and select the feature representing the rotation axis for the pattern. All Rights Reserved 263 . click the Circular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating circular patterns. 2. On the Panel Bar.

click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. You then edit the patterned features to suppress occurrences within each. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features 264 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . you open a face plate component and create both rectangular and patterned features. click Exercise: Pattern Features 2.Exercise: Pattern Features In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Depending on the design and manufacturing intent. you need to apply draft angles to the faces to allow for the part to be pulled from the mold. you might apply the draft angle to all faces. Indexer Component with Face Drafts Objectives After completing this lesson. All Rights Reserved 265 . Inc. In this lesson you learn how to apply draft angles to faces using the Face Draft tool. or to single selected faces. This draft angle is referred to as a face draft. you will be able to • Use the Face Draft tool to create and edit face drafts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Face Drafts Overview Overview Overview When you create designs for casting or molds.

draft angles are generally very small. The result of the draft angle depends on the orientation of the face in relation to the Pull Direction. A draft angle applied to faces on the part allows the part to be pulled away from the mold. Procedure When you create the face draft feature. you select the faces to apply the draft angle. or origin plane or axis.The Face Draft Tool You use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on the part. In this lesson you learn how to create face drafts using each of these methods. you must specify the Pull Direction. When you create a face draft feature. edge. For visual clarity. Before and After Face Draft Feature Face Draft Angles In reality. the draft angles in this lesson may be exaggerated. which can be based on a face. you can also choose between a Fixed Edge face draft or Fixed Plane face draft. Note Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Face Draft tool. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+D 266 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . After you define the Pull Direction.

Pull Direction: Select a face. Inc. The Pull Direction is normal to the selected plane. After you make the selection. Draft Angle: Specify an angle value for the face draft. Faces: Select the faces to apply the face draft feature. Note: If you select an incorrect edge. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. be certain to select the edge you want to remain fixed. Depending on the position of the selected plane this method causes material to be added on one side of the plane and subtracted from the opposite side of the plane. use the CTRL or SHIFT key and reselect the edge to remove it from the selection set. edge. you can use the Flip Direction button to flip the Pull Direction. plane. All Rights Reserved 267 . If using the Fixed Edge method. Fixed Plane Method: This method creates a face draft calculated from the location of the selected plane. or axis to define the direction the part is pulled away from the mold.The Face Draft dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Fixed Edge Method: This method creates a face draft on the selected face(s) and the selected edge remains fixed in place.

The face drafts are applied to the selected faces. 3. In the Draft Angle box. 268 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .Creating Face Drafts . 2. select the face at a point closest to the fixed edge. In the Face Draft dialog box. edge. click the Face Draft tool. Create a new part containing the features requiring face drafts. or axis to define the Pull Direction. On the Panel Bar. 1. select the Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane method and then select a face. Select the faces to apply the face draft. If you are using the Fixed Edge method. Click OK to create the face draft. plane. enter an angle value.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating face drafts.

Inc. All Rights Reserved 269 . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. click Exercise: Face Drafts 2. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Face Drafts In this exercise. You will experiment with both the Fixed Edge method and Fixed Plane method for creating the face draft. Indexer Component with Face Drafts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you create and edit face drafts on the part.

a default color style is assigned. Assigning a New Color Style Objectives After completing this lesson.Creating and Using Color Styles Overview Overview Overview As you create new parts using Autodesk Inventor. you will be able to • Change and assign color styles to parts 270 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . You can assign different colors to parts and even create new custom color styles. In this lesson you learn how to create and assign color styles to parts.

All Rights Reserved 271 . If you create a new color style. it is available only in the part or assembly in which it was created. which is located on the Format pull-down menu. Specular. Color Tab: Located on this tab. Other color styles are available and can be accessed from the Style drop-down list on the Standard toolbar. Select the color swatch next to each properties and select a color from the Custom Color dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. they are assigned the Default color style. Save: Click to save the changes to the selected color style.Standard Toolbar Format > Colors Color Dialog Box Style Name: Enter a color style name. You can copy these custom color styles to templates or other part files by using the Organizer tool. Emissive. the color style name will appear here. Use the following methods to create and apply color styles. Diffuse. Pull-Down Menu To Assign Colors . Appearance: Use the sliders to adjust the Shiny and Opaque color properties. is four color properties. The list will update to reflect the closest match. and Ambient.Creating and Using Color Styles When you create new parts. When selecting a material from the list. Inc. Procedure Color styles are stored within each part or assembly file.

Colors Dialog Box . Rotation: Adjust the slider to rotate the texture map. Apply: Click to apply the changes to the color style. Texture Chooser Dialog Box Select a texture by dragging the slider in the preview window. Remove: Click to remove the selected texture from the color style. Close: Click to close the dialog box.Delete: Click to delete the selected color style.Texture Tab Choose: Click to display the Texture Chooser dialog box. New: Click to create a new color style. Project Library: Select this option to display textures stored within the current project. %Scale: Adjust the slider to scale the texture map. and leave the dialog box open. Texture Library: • • Application Library: Select this option to display textures from the Application library. 272 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles In this exercise. you will create a new color style and apply it to your part. From the Main table of contents page. Inc. Assigning a New Color Style Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 273 . click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features.

The handle is a two piece design for which you are creating one half of the handle. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Plastic Handle 274 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features 2. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise you will utilize the procedures and concepts learned in this lesson to create a plastic handle. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features.

How to create and use custom color styles on a part model. Why face drafts are typically used and how these manufacturing methods correlate to options in the dialog box such as Pull-Direction. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Three methods available for creating chamfers and how to use each method. All Rights Reserved 275 . How to edit a pattern and suppress feature occurrences in the pattern if required. The different options available in the Holes dialog box and how to use these options to create different types of holes. How to remove material from your part by using the Shell tool. How to create and edit Hole and Thread features on a part model. How to use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on a part model. How to create and edit rectangular and circular patterns on a part model.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • How to create and edit fillet features on a part file. How to use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet feature is created. The options available for each type of pattern and the effect of these options on the pattern features. How to create a custom color style that includes a texture map. How to use the options in the Shell dialog box and how they effect the shell feature. Inc. How to add thread features to a model. How to adjust options in the Colors dialog box to effect the appearance properties of a new color style.

276 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Overview Overview Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about.. Analyzing components of an assembly. you will be able to. Top Down. Locating components in and out of the assembly by using different versions of the Find tool. • Apply Bottom Up. Dragging components into the assembly and replacing components in the assembly. resequence and reorder the assembly and use browser filters Create Design Views to save assembly views with specific display related characteristics Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool Drag components into an assembly Replace existing components in an assembly Create new components in the context of the assembly Place assembly constraints Create basic adaptive features for parts used in an assembly • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . Degrees of freedom Simulating motion in an assembly Placing assembly constraints. and Middle Out assembly techniques Use the browser to control different aspects of the assembly environment Activate components inplace within the assembly.. The Place Component tool. Controlling the appearance of parts and features in the browser and using Design Views to save assembly views. • • • The assembly modeling environment and interface used to create assembly models. The Assembly Browser. In this chapter After completing this chapter. Adaptivity and how it can be used in the assembly. Assembly based work features Using geometry projected from other parts in the assembly to help create new parts.. Creating components in the context of the assembly..

Introduction to Assembly Modeling Overview Using Assembly modeling you bring individual components into a common environment and use various tools to assemble them. and manage the relationships between the parts in the assembly. place existing parts and/or assemblies. you will learn the concept of assembly modeling and the tools you use to create an assembly. you will be able to • • • Understand the concept of assembly modeling and the procedures you use to create an assembly model Navigate the assembly environment and identify the assembly coordinate system Use the Assembly Panel Bar 278 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You create new geometry. In this lesson. Completed Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson.

Inc. which enables a component to change size based upon its relationship to other components in the assembly. to advanced relationships such as adaptivity. All Rights Reserved 279 . Parametric relationships are created between each component that determine component behavior in the assembly. Concept These relationships can range from simple constraint based relationships that determine a components position in the assembly.Assembly Modeling Concepts You create an assembly by combining multiple components and/or assemblies into a single environment. Typical Assembly Model Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

You create and edit all geometry while working in the overall assembly. 280 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . additional parts are created. You create a blank assembly. and are making changes to parts based upon their relationships to other components in the assembly. then design each component while still in the assembly environment. • Top Down Assembly Modeling: All assembly components are designed in the context of the assembly. The initial part is created. you are applying the required assembly constraints. then while working in the context of the assembly. The image below represents a Top-Down approach to assembly modeling.Assembly Modeling Methods Before you create assembly models you must understand the three basic methods you use to create them and how to choose the correct assembly modeling approach. As you design each component.

If changes to the parts are required. they are made outside of the assembly and will automatically be reflected in the assembly model. Each part is designed separate from the assembly and other components. After you create the parts they are placed into the assembly and constrained to other parts. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Each part file is designed separate from the assembly and other parts.• Bottom Up Assembly Modeling: Individual components for an assembly are designed outside of the assembly where they will be placed. they are placed into the assembly. Inc. The image below represents a typical Bottom-Up approach to assembly modeling. After the components are designed. All Rights Reserved 281 .

while others are being designed in the context of the assembly. As you become more proficient with the application. a typical assembly would generally consist of components that are designed specifically for the assembly. you have essentially switched to Middle Out approach because you have included parts in the assembly that were created outside of the assembly. The image below represents a Middle Out approach to assembly modeling. You can begin the assembly using one method and change to a different one. Some components are being placed in the assembly. You can use all of the methods above and switch between them at anytime. you will be able to choose the best approach for a given task. For example.• Middle Out Assembly Modeling: This flexible approach closely represents the actual real-world design process. and understand the benefits to each modeling approach. or other standard hardware. bolts. 282 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . as soon as you insert the standard off-the-shelf components. So even if you design all of the non-standard components using a Top-Down approach. and other standard off-the-shelf components such as nuts.

edges. Generally applied to circular faces and planar faces. Applied to faces. All Rights Reserved 283 . each with unique solutions and options. Insert Constraint: Used to insert one component into another. There are four basic assembly constraints. Just as you use 2D constraints to control 2D geometry. Applied by selecting a circular edge on each part. or axis. or any part that needs to be inserted into a hole on another part. edges. Generally applied to bolts. or pins.Assembly Constraints You use Assembly constraints to create parametric relationships between parts in the assembly. Angle Constraint: Used to specify an angle between two parts. or axes. One of the selected faces must be circular. This constraint effectively combines a mate axis/axis and a mate face/face constraint. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Mate/Flush Constraint: Used to align part features such as faces. Inc. Tangent Constraint: Used to define a tangential relationship between two parts. Each of these constraint types will be described in greater detail later in this chapter. you use 3D constraints in an assembly to position parts in relation to other parts.

thus leaving the parts that are common to all assemblies. 284 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . while the subassembly is constrained to the overall assembly as a single component. the subassembly behaves as a single part. you create an assembly which was designed to accommodate several different electric motors. The features however are not stored within the parts that are affected but are local to the current assembly and only effect the parts in the context of the current assembly. For example. Assembly Sketching You use Assembly sketching to create assembly based features such as holes. Each motor type requires a different hole pattern and other cutouts for routing the wiring harness. To do so you activate the subassembly by double-clicking on the subassembly in the browser. extrusions. In the context of the overall assembly. The use of assembly features would enable you to create these motor-specific features at the assembly level. You must edit constraints within the assembly where they were created. Components within the subassembly are constrained to each other. A subassembly is essentially an assembly placed into another assembly. unaffected by the feature. and chamfers on parts in the assembly. You can use these features in situations where assemblies share common parts but with features that are unique to the assembly. Assembly based sketches serve as the basis for assembly features.Subassemblies You use Subassemblies to organize large assemblies into smaller groups.

Default coordinate system elements are aligned with the 0. All Rights Reserved 285 . When you place the first part into the assembly. Inc. When a part is activated for editing. Note: This only applies if the first part in the assembly is placed into. the browser functions are identical to the part modeling environment. 3D Indicator: Displays the current view orientation relative to the assembly coordinate system.0. Assembly Components: Each component in the assembly is listed. Expand the components to expose the assembly constraints that have been applied. Assembly Coordinate Elements: Identical to the part environment. Principle Assembly Modeling Environment Assembly Panel Bar: Contains tools specific to assembly modeling. each assembly also contains an independent coordinate system.0 point in the assembly and can be used as you build the assembly. Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin planes. the origin point of the part file will be matched to the origin point of the assembly file. Assembly Browser: Lists all parts and their constraints. axes. Assembly Coordinate System Each assembly file contains an independent coordinate system.Assembly Environment The assembly environment in Autodesk Inventor software is virtually the same as the part modeling environment with the exception of tools that are unique to assembly modeling. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and not created from scratch in the context of the assembly. and center point.

Assembly Panel Bar Similar to the Part Modeling Panel Bar. the Assembly Panel Bar contains the tools specific to assembly modeling. then select Expert. 286 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Part. At the top of the panel bar. Assembly Panel Bar After you become familiar with the assembly tool icons. Enter these key sequences to start the related tool. and Sketch modes depending on the context you are using. select the Assembly Panel drop-down. the Panel Bar will automatically switch between Assembly. you can switch the panel bar to expert mode. you will make more room available for the Assembly/Part browser. As you create your assembly model. By setting the Panel Bar to expert mode. Procedure Note the keyboard shortcuts next to each icon.

Inc. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling 2. Some techniques performed during this lesson will be covered in greater detail later in this chapter. Completed Assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 287 . The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. you will create a basic assembly model using some of the concepts mentioned in this lesson. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling In this exercise.

In this lesson you will learn about the various options available through the Assembly Browser. 5-Axis Robot Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson.Assembly Browser Overview Overview Overview The Assembly Browser offers several options for working in the assembly environment and is your primary tool for interacting with the assembly components and features. you will be able to • • • • • • • Activate and edit parts in the context of the assembly Control the visibility of parts in an assembly Resequence and Restructure an assembly Create browser filters and utilize them in an assembly Enable and disable components in an assembly Identify grounded components in an assembly and how they effect other assembly components Create and use Design Views 288 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

In the Browser or graphics window. Any changes to the part are automatically reflected in the assembly.In-Place Activation In-Place Activation means you activate a part in the context of the assembly. In the Browser or graphics window.Shortcut Menu Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In order to edit a part in the context of the assembly. you must activate the part. Procedure • • • In the Browser or graphics window. Inc. double-click on the part. In-Place Activation . right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Edit. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Open. This option will open the part in a separate window. There are a few options available for activating a part in-place. All Rights Reserved 289 .

In the graphics window.Active Part and Active Part in the Context of the Assembly 290 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . The Panel Bar switches to display the modeling tools. In the Browser. the background behind all other parts is greyed. the non-active parts are dimmed. • • • • In the Browser. Assembly Browser . the part is automatically expanded to expose the part features. the assembly environment changes.Result of In-Place Activation When a part is activated in the context of the assembly.

Browser Part Visibility Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. in the Assembly Browser or graphics window. Check mark indicates the part is currently visible.Visibility Control It is possible to control the visibility of all elements in the assembly. parts with the visibility property turned off appear grey. While you work in the context of the assembly. Procedure Browser Appearance In the Assembly browser. All Rights Reserved 291 . Inc. right-click on an element in the assembly and select Visibility on the shortcut menu.

Assembly Resequencing Assembly Restructure As you create your assembly. click and drag on the part and release the mouse at its new position. at some point you may need to organize the assembly by placing components into subassemblies. Parts are displayed in the browser in the order in which they are placed or created.Assembly Resequence It is possible to resequence the order of parts in the assembly. in the browser. Resequencing the assembly enables you to place the parts in a more logical order. Procedure To resequence the assembly. By restructuring the assembly you are creating subassemblies and placing existing parts into the subassembly. select one or more parts then right-click on a part and select Demote Keyboard Shortcut Select one or more parts and press TAB 292 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Shortcut Menu In the browser or graphics window. Procedure Access Methods The following methods are available for restructuring your assembly.

If you restructure the parts separately you will loose the assembly constraints and will need to recreate them. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.When you restructure an assembly using the Demote tool. Template: Select a template to use for the new subassembly. select all the parts in the browser or graphics window and then select the Demote tool. All Rights Reserved 293 . you should restructure all parts to be included in the subassembly. Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Dialog Box When restructuring parts into subassemblies. To restructure all parts in one step. Inc. When possible. New File Location: Enter or browse the location for the new subassembly. there is a potential that you will loose some assembly constraints during the restructuring process. Constraints applied to parts residing in the same assembly will be maintained if they are restructured into a new subassembly at the same time. Constraints applied to parts residing in different assemblies and subassemblies will not be maintained. at the same time. the Create In-Place Component dialog box appears. This will place all selected parts into the new subassembly and maintain the constraints. Create In-Place Dialog Box New File Name: Enter a file name for the subassembly.

Drag and Drop Restructuring 294 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . you may loose assembly constraints using this method.Drag and Drop Restructuring If a subassembly already exists. It is also possible to drag and drop parts from the subassembly to the top level assembly. Depending on the constraint conditions. it is possible to restructure the assembly by dragging parts from the top level assembly to the subassembly.

Browser Filters You can filter the display of information in the browser by using the browser filters. Hides parts contained within a subassembly when the top-level assembly is active. As your assembly grows in complexity. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 295 . Show Children Only: Displays only first level children. Procedure Hide Work Features: Hides all work features including the Origin folders. Hide Notes: Hides all notes attached to features. Hide Documents: Hides inserted documents. At the top of the Assembly Browser. click the Filter button and the filter menu is displayed. the browser filters can assist you by streamlining its information. Hide Warnings: Hides warning symbols attached to constraints in the browser. Inc.

While in the Modeling View. note the appearance of the assembly constraints while in the Position View and the part features while in Modeling View. It displays the parts and assembly constraints. This mode enables you to identify part features and activate them for editing without having to activate the part. 296 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . note also the Constraints folder at the top. Expand this folder to expose the assembly constraints. You can change the display mode to Modeling View by selecting the Position Mode drop-down menu at the top of the browser. Procedure Assembly Browser Display Modes When you examine the images above.Browser Display Mode When you work in an assembly the Assembly browser display mode defaults to Position View. The Modeling View will display the parts and their features.

When a component is enabled you have access to the component for editing and applying constraints. it appears dimmed in the graphics window and its icon color in the browser changes to green. For large assemblies this is beneficial to increasing overall system performance.Enabled Components By default. All Rights Reserved 297 . when you place components into an assembly. they are enabled. the data structure of enabled components is available while components that are not enabled. When a component is not enabled. Assembly with Component Not Enabled In the browser or graphics window. Concept When you open an assembly. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. only the graphics information is loaded. A check mark indicates the part is currently enabled. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu. click Enabled.

click Grounded. the non-grounded component will move to validate the constraint while the grounded component remains fixed in its position.Grounded Components By default. When you apply constraints to a grounded component. Concept Although the first part is grounded. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu. Grounded Components in Browser 298 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . there is no limit to the number of grounded parts that you can have in an assembly. In the browser or graphics window. Grounded components appear in the browser with the Push Pin icon. while others will move relative to the parts to which they have been constrained. You can also remove the grounded property from the first part in the assembly. All degrees of freedom are removed from the component and it cannot be moved. the first part in each assembly is grounded. When you ground parts you can use them to mimic real-world situation where some parts are fixed in position.

UserName. Browser Menu Area Pull Down Menu View > Design Views Each Design View file can contain multiple design views. You can also use Design views as the basis for Drawing and Presentation views. If you save the display configuration as a new design view. Inc.Design Views When you create a new assembly file. • • • • • • Component visibility (visible or not visible) Sketch and work feature visibility Component enabled status Color and style properties applied in the assembly Zoom and viewing angle Browser display mode (Position or Modeling) Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing Design Views. Design Views are used to store assembly display configurations that you can recall the next time you work on the assembly. as you work on an assembly. you can recall that configuration by activating the design view. Procedure Several different properties are stored within the design view. • • • system. All Rights Reserved 299 . you may need to turn the visibility off of several components to work on parts internally. Design Views are stored in the same directory as the assembly and by default have the same name as the assembly with an *. For example.default: This design view is automatically created and is based Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.nothing visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components off. By default there will be three design views created. a separate Design View file is automatically created.all visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components on.idv extension The following properties are stored within design view. system.

Delete: Click to delete the selected design view. 300 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .upon your system user name. Design Views Dialog Box Storage Location: Represents the current storage location for the design view file. Enter a new design view name. Apply: Click to activate the selected design view. Browse: Click to browse for a design view file. New: Click to create a new design view file. Design View: Lists the name of the currently selected design view. Save: Click to save the current display configuration as a design view.

Inc. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. 5-Axis Robot Assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you will open an assembly file and use the Assembly Browser to perform several tasks.Exercise: Assembly Browser In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. All Rights Reserved 301 . click Exercise: Assembly Browser 2.

Completed Robot Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson.Placing Components in an Assembly Overview Overview Overview As you create assemblies you place component geometry that represents the assembly's individual parts. you will be able to • • • • Use the Place Component tool to place parts into an assembly Utilize sources other than Autodesk Inventor software to place components Drag components into an assembly Replace components in an assembly 302 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . In this lesson you will learn about several different ways you can place components into an assembly.

You can place additional occurrences of the part by clicking different locations in the graphics window. To place files other than Autodesk Inventor software files.The Place Component Tool You use the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Keyboard Shortcut P Open Dialog Box Select the file to place into the assembly and click Open. Procedure The first component you place into the assembly will be automatically placed at the assembly's origin point (0. however the end result is the selected file will be placed into the assembly file instead of opened for editing. Inc.0) and will be grounded. select the file type in the Files of type drop-down list. The same options for opening files are available.0. All Rights Reserved 303 . Select this tool and the Open dialog box will be displayed. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Place Component tool. After you place the part into the assembly. right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu.

5. In the Open dialog box. On the Panel Bar. 2.Placing Components . and click Open. On the Panel Bar. or press ESC to cancel.Process Overview The following steps are an overview for using the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. 1. 3. click the Place Component tool. 304 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . select the file you want to place into the assembly. The first component in the assembly is positioned automatically and is grounded. Open or create a new assembly file. 4. click the Place Component tool and continue to place components into the assembly. Optionally place additional components by clicking other locations in the graphics window.

asm) Different capabilities are available with each of these formats.stp.dwg) SAT files (*. but others such as Autodesk Mechanical Desktop will be linked to the assembly. *. Supported Formats Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.step) Pro Engineer (*.prt.ste. (*. *.iam) Autodesk Mechanical Desktop (*. Inc. All Rights Reserved 305 . *. *. *.Sources of Placed Components As you use Autodesk Inventor software to build assemblies you can use geometry from other applications as parts in your assembly. would be reflected in the assembly.iges) STEP files (*. The following list represents the supported formats that you can place into an assembly.ige. Supported File Types In the Open dialog box.ipt. Some formats will be converted to Autodesk Inventor files when placed into an assembly. Concept • • • • • • • Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies. Any changes in the Autodesk Mechanical Desktop file.dwg) AutoCAD (*. select the Files of type drop-down list to display the supported file types. *.igs.sat) (ACIS/ShapeManager) IGES files (*.

306 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Changes to the part would be reflected in the assembly.Mechanical Desktop Parts in an Autodesk Inventor Assembly The image above represents an Autodesk Mechanical Desktop part used in an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Right-click on the part and then select Open to open the part in Autodesk Mechanical Desktop.

Dragging an Open Part File into an Assembly In the image below. This results in the component being placed into the assembly just as if you had used the Place Component tool. a component is being dragged into the assembly from a Windows Explorer window.Dragging Components into an Assembly You can drag components into an assembly from other open part files or from Windows Explorer. Inc. the active part file.ipt is being dragged into the nonactive but open assembly. All Rights Reserved 307 . Procedure In the image below. Dragging Components from Windows Explorer Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. robo_hand.

the following message will appear. The message means that the current location is not referenced in the Project file. If not.When you drag components from a Windows Explorer window. If you place the component in the assembly. make certain the location of the component is referenced in the current Project file. you must edit the Project paths before re-opening the assembly to include component location or move the component to a location identified within the current project. 308 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Click OK to place the component in the assembly. As a result Autodesk Inventor may not be able to locate the file the next time the assembly is opened.

All Rights Reserved 309 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Replacing Components As you build assemblies. Click OK to continue and replace the selected component. There are two versions of the Replace component tool: . some assembly constraints will be lost and need to be recreated. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+H > Replace SHIFT+H > Replace All Possible Constraint Loss Dialog Box When you replace components in an assembly the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box will appear. you may need to replace components. Procedure When you replace components in an assembly. the new version is placed in the same location as the existing version. you may not have access to all the required parts. you can use the Replace tool to replace the proxy part with the final version. For example when you start the assembly. When the component is replaced. In the meantime you place a proxy part in place of the final part.Replaces only the selected component. .Replaces all occurrences of the selected component. Access Methods The following methods are available for access the Replace component tool. The origin of the new component is coincident with the origin of the component being replaced. Inc. but the result depends largely on the differences in geometry between the existing component and the replacement component. or click Cancel to cancel the operation. Autodesk Inventor software will attempt to retain the constraints. After you receive the required geometry.

310 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . double-click on the replacement component.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for replacing components. On the Panel Bar. 2. select the component to be replaced. 1.Replacing Components . In the browser or graphics window. click OK to replace the component. click the Replace component tool and in the Open dialog box. If the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box appears.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Replace All tool. All Rights Reserved 311 . 6. double-click on the replacement component. Click OK in the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box. select one of the occurrences and on the Panel Bar. To replace multiple occurrences of the same part. 4.3. All occurrences of the selected component are replaced. Inc. 5. In the Open dialog box.

click Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly 2.Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly In this exercise. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. Completed Robot Assembly 312 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you use the techniques covered in this lesson to place components into a new assembly. From the Main table of contents page. After you place the components. you will use the Replace Component tool to replace components in the assembly.

Creating Components in an Assembly Overview Overview Overview Creating components in an assembly enables you to design parts in the context of the assembly in which they will reside. This technique enables you to take advantage of other part features in the assembly to create new geometry and validate this new geometry based upon the design intent. you will be able to • • • • Create parts in the context of the assembly Use work features in assemblies Use 2D sketches in an assembly Use projected edges and features Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In this lesson you will learn how to create components in the context of an assembly. Components Created In-Place Objectives After completing this lesson. All Rights Reserved 313 . Inc.

Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut N 314 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Creating Parts in Place Creating parts in the context of the assembly enables you to take advantage of other geometry in the assembly by referencing the features of other parts to assist in the creation of new parts. Ability to validate function within the assembly. Example of Creating a Part in Place Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Create Component tool. Ability to create adaptive relationships between parts. Presents a better picture of the overall design intent. Procedure Benefits to Creating Parts in Place The following list represents some of the benefits of creating parts in the context of the assembly. this approach enables you to design new parts in the assembly environment in which they will reside. • • • • Ability to reference other parts in the assembly. Commonly referred to as Top-Down assembly modeling.

Creating Parts and Subassemblies in Place . Browse: Click to browse for a template file. assembly. On the Panel Bar. Template: Select a template to use for the new part or assembly file. Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane: Selecting this option will place a flush constraint between the new part and the selected face. 1. File Type: Select the file type in the drop-down list.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating parts and subassemblies in place. All Rights Reserved 315 . New File Location: Enter the location for the new part or assembly file. Inc. Click OK to create the new part. or create a new.Create In-Place Component Dialog Box New FIle Name: Enter a name for the new file. Open an existing. 2. • • Part: Select to create a new part file. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Assembly: Select to create subassembly. click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

Use the sketching tools available to create new sketch geometry or project geometry from other parts in the assembly.3. 4. To create a subassembly in-place: 316 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 6. Use part modeling tools to create the 3D geometry. Select a face or plane to define the initial sketch plane on the new part. 5.

Click OK to create the new subassembly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. You can now create new parts in the context of the subassembly or place components that have already been created. click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. 9. All Rights Reserved 317 .7. Select a face or plane to orient the new subassembly's origin. 8. The subassembly is automatically activated. On the Panel Bar.

remember that the assembly file contains it own coordinate system and origin work features. Work Axis. You can use them to orient sketch planes on new parts and they can serve as the basis for additional work features in new parts. and Work Point tools to create new assembly based work features. Assembly Work Feature Being Used 318 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Concept You will also find the Work Plane.Using Work Features in Assemblies As you create components in the context of the assembly.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using 2D Sketches in an assembly. 1. Constraint Dragging 2D Parts in an Assembly Using 2D Sketches in the Assembly . it is not necessary to create 3D features in the initial design phases. As you do.Using 2D Sketches You can use 2D sketches in the assembly while you create new parts and validate design intent. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can create the fundamental sketch geometry you need to validate certain features and then exit the part and assign assembly constraints to the 2D parts in the same way you apply constraints to 3D features. All Rights Reserved 319 . Procedure Using this technique enables you to validate the part's intended function before spending the time required to develop the parts final form. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and use the sketching tools to create only the geometry required to validate function. Inc.

2. 320 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 3. 4. The 2D parts will react in the assembly the same way as a fully developed 3D part. Apply assembly constraints between the new 2D part and the existing parts. Validate the components by constraint dragging the 2D parts and/or editing dimensions and/or other constraints. 5. Exit the part and return to the assembly environment. If required. create additional parts containing 2D geometry and constrain as required.

Projecting Edges and Features The follow methods are available for accessing the tools to project edges and features. Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned For more information on the use of projected geometry. You can also use this projected geometry to create features on the current part. you can project edges and features from other parts in the assembly. Procedure When you project 2D geometry across parts in the assembly. refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system. Inc. some of which are beyond the scope of this course. The following table represents some key differences between Associative Reference geometry and Static Reference geometry. Static reference geometry is not linked back to the originating part and will not change if the source features change. All Rights Reserved 321 . Panel Bar Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Associative reference geometry maintains a link to the original part and changes if the feature from which it was projected changes.Using Projected Edges and Features Using the same tools to project edges and features in a single part file. Each type offers unique benefits and drawbacks. Associative Reference Receiving part is adaptive Degrees of freedom on receiving part are reduced. The biggest difference between associative or static reference geometry is what happens to the projected geometry if the originating feature changes. Using this technique. Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned Static Reference Receiving part is not adaptive Degrees of freedom on receiving part are not effected. the resulting geometry will either be associative reference geometry or static reference geometry. you can create parts within the assembly with matching or uniform features.

click the Assembly tab and adjust the option accordingly. feature and part. In the Options dialog box. If this option is chosen Autodesk Inventor will assign an Adaptive status to the current part and active sketch. on the Tools menu click Application Options. Adaptivity will be introduced later in this chapter.To enable or disable the associative reference geometry. Projected Associative Reference Geometry 322 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . it also adds a certain level of complexity to managing the geometry. Clearing this option will create static reference geometry.Assembly Tab (Partial) Cross Part Geometry Projection: Selecting this option will create associative reference geometry. Options Dialog Box . the projected geometry is associative. Note the appearance in the browser and the adaptive icon associated with the adaptive sketch. In the image below. Although this adds a degree of flexibility in regards to the design process.

In the image below. Inc. When projecting cross-part geometry. static reference geometry is magenta. All Rights Reserved 323 . projected geometry is static. There is no adaptive icon or linked reference to the sketch. while associative reference geometry is black. Note the appearance of the sketch in the browser. Projected Static Reference Geometry Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Components Created In-Place 324 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You will create additional parts in place and project geometry from other parts in the assembly. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals.Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly In this exercise. click Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly 2. You will use the 2D sketch geometry to validate assembly function before creating the 3D features. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you will open an assembly and create new components using the techniques learned in this lesson. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

and how they are affected by constraints Perform an unconstrained drag Perform a constrained drag Drive assembly constraints Move and rotate components in an assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 325 . The method you choose will largely depend upon the constraint condition of the components and/or the task you need to accomplish. In this lesson you will learn how to move components in an assembly.Moving Components Overview Overview Overview There are several methods available for moving components in an assembly. you will be able to • • • • • Identify the remaining degrees of freedom on a part. Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints Objectives After completing this lesson. Inc.

it is considered to be fully constrained. How to View a Components Degrees of Freedom There are two methods available for viewing the DOF symbol on components in the assembly. To view individual component's DOF symbol. click Properties. if you have an assembly with components that are designed to move along a given axis. is Translational freedom. you reduce the degrees of freedom for the components being constrained. The degrees of freedom that enable a component to move along an axis. 326 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Degrees of Freedom Each component in an assembly will initially have six degrees of freedom (DOF). and Z axes. They represent how you can move the component along or rotated about each of the X. on the View menu. while the degrees of freedom that enable a part to rotate about an axis is Rotational freedom. In some cases you do not want to fully constrain a component. • • To view the DOF symbols on all components in the assembly. click the Occurrence tab and select the Degrees of Freedom option. Degrees of Freedom Symbol The image above represents the DOF symbol that can be viewed on each part in the assembly. click Degrees of Freedom or enter SHIFT+E. You do not have to fully constrain any component in the assembly. When a part has no degrees of freedom remaining. then you should leave the degrees of freedom to allow that movement. right-click on the component. and on the shortcut menu. For example. Concept As you apply assembly constraints to components. Y. In the Properties dialog box.

Grounded Components Note When components are grounded in an assembly. All Rights Reserved 327 . 3. 2. The Effect of Constraints on Degrees of Freedom The following steps represent the effect of assembly constraints on degrees of freedom. The unconstrained component has all six degrees of freedom remaining. Inc. all degrees of freedom are removed. Part is fully constrained. 4. No remaining degrees of freedom. Three degrees of freedom are removed. Flush constraint being applied. Mate constraint being applied. A grounded component has no degrees of freedom. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Two degrees of freedom removed. 1. three remain. it has no degrees of freedom remaining. Flush constraint being applied. Because the first part in each assembly is automatically grounded. one remains.

Procedure 328 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . It is sometimes necessary to move components in order to place assembly constraints. You are able to drag the component in the directions allowed by the remaining degrees of freedom. Other components constrained to the selected component will also move based upon their remaining degrees of freedom. Procedure Unconstrained Drag Constrained Drag To perform a constrained drag you click and drag on a component that is constrained in the assembly.Unconstrained Drag You can move unconstrained components by dragging them in the graphics window.

this value will be an angle format. End: Enter a maximum value for the current constraint.Constraint Drivers As you build assemblies and add constraints to the parts. All Rights Reserved 329 . each constraint type contains a property representing an offset or angle value. For angular constraint. Procedure When you create assembly constraints. this value will represent a distance. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. other assembly constraints are constantly evaluated and the assembly components are only allowed to move through the available degrees of freedom for each component. Pause Delay: Enter a delay in seconds to be applied between steps. When you drive a constraint. for all other constraints. You animate the assembly by driving the constraints through the range specified. Shortcut Menu Right-click on a constraint and select Drive Constraint Drive Constraint Dialog Box Start: Enter a minimum value for the current constraint. Driving constraints makes this visualization possible. Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Drive Constraints tool. these values are assigned a Start and End value. you may need to visualize the assembly in motion to see how the components interact with each other. While you drive the constraint.

If a collision is detected. Collision Detection: When selected. Increment: Select the method for calculating the increment of simulation. AVI rate: Specifies frame rate when recording the simulation. the dialog box will be minimized while recording the sequence. the assembly is analyzed for interference as each component moves through its sequence. will allow adaptive parts to update if necessary based upon changes in the assembly. Total # of steps: Uses the value below for the total number of steps for the sequence. Value: Enter a value for the increment method. 330 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Repetitions: • • Start/End: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position. Minimize dialog during recording: When selected. the motion is stopped at the point of interference. Start/End/Start: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position and back to its Start position.Player Controls: Use the standard player controls to drive the constraint through its sequence. Click to record the sequence to a standard AVI format. Drive Adaptivity: When selected. • • • Amount of value: Uses the value below to increment each step of the sequence.

In the browser. Inc. enter a Start and End value. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Refer to the Advanced Assembly Modeling course from Autodesk. 3. The assembly constraint is driven through its Start and End positions. for more information. adjust other settings as required and click the Play button to drive the constraint. All Rights Reserved 331 . In the Drive constraint dialog box.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for driving assembly constraints. through the use of parameters and formulas it is possible to drive more than one constraint at a time. Inc. 1. Driving More Than One Constraint Note Although it is beyond the scope of this course.Driving Constraints . click Drive Constraint. 2. right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu.

Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcuts V = Move G = Rotate Rotating Components .Potential Cursors 332 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . select the appropriate tool then click and drag on the part being moved or rotated. enabling you to move or rotate the components independently from the degrees of freedom that may be remaining on the part. you can move components in the assembly just as if they were not constrained at all. When you use these tools on a component in the assembly. After you move or rotate the component click the Update button on the Standard toolbar to reapply the assembly constraints. Using these tools. Procedure To move or rotate a component in the assembly. the assembly constraints are temporarily ignored. Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Move and Rotate Component tools.Moving and Rotating Components To move constrained components in an assembly to facilitate adding additional constraints you use either Move Component or Rotate Component tools.

All Rights Reserved 333 . the 3D Rotate symbol appears similar to the 3D Rotate symbol when rotating views. Moving or Rotating Grounded Components Note If you move or rotate a grounded component. Click and drag in the appropriate location to rotate the component.When you rotate components. it will not move back to its original location after performing an Update. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Moving Components In this exercise. you will open an assembly and view the available degrees of freedom on different components. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints 334 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You will then use the techniques learned in this lesson to move the components and drive assembly constraints. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Exercise: Moving Components 2.

Constraining Components Overview Overview Overview When you build assemblies you define parametric relationships between the parts in the assembly. After you apply the constraints. All Rights Reserved 335 . realistically mimics real-world situations and operating conditions of the assembly components. In this lesson you will learn how to apply. You apply assembly constraints to the parts to define their position and available degrees of freedom. The relationships created between parts using assembly constraints. Inc. You use the Constraint tool or the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints without using the Place Constraint dialog box. view. LCD-Mount Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • Understand how assembly constraints effect individual parts in the assembly Apply and edit basic assembly constraints in the assembly View assembly constraints in the browser Use the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. there are a couple of ways to view the constraints in the browser. and edit assembly constraints. and if necessary edit the constraints.

When you start the Constraint tool.Placing Constraints You apply each assembly constraint to either two components in the assembly or to one component and one assembly origin feature. or work features (work planes. If a component in an assembly is not intended to be constrained to other components. you should apply the constraints using the simplest approach possible while using constraint solutions that will constrain the parts as completely as required by the design intent. but parts should not be left unconstrained. or points) at the assembly or part level. As you plan the constraints. you will select one feature on each part to apply it. angle. then it should be grounded or constrained to assembly level work features. The geometry that you choose is dependent upon the type of constraint you apply. Example of Assembly Constraint Simple but complete When you apply assembly constraints to parts. You are not required to fully constrain parts in the assembly. Using this approach enables you to develop an assembly of parts that interact as intended with other parts in the assembly. Concept There are four types of assembly constraints that can be applied between parts: mate. The features to which the constraints are applied can be geometric part features. The constraint type chosen will depend upon the part features and the design intent. mimic the real world conditions of the parts in the assembly by using assembly constraint solutions that most closely resemble how the parts will be assembled after manufacturing. tangent. after you select the type of constraint. 336 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . axes. or with constraint conditions that do not fully represent the intended function of the part in the assembly. an insert.

However after analyzing how the components will be put together. Example of Proper Constraint Planning Placing Constraints on Obstructed Geometry Tip When placing constraints on obstructed geometry or features.In the image below. select the Hidden Edge Display options to display all edges on the parts. you could use a variety of different constraint solutions to assemble these two components. the proper constraint is used to mimic the real world process of assembling the two components. All Rights Reserved 337 . on the Standard toolbar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

2. Depending on the type of constraint. On the Panel Bar. Open or create an assembly. Select the features to apply the constraints.Process Overview Although each type of constraint will create a different result. The following steps represent an overview for applying constraints. and the geometry chosen.How to Place Constraints . 338 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 3. you are given a preview of how the constraint will be applied. the overall process of applying constraints is the same. 1. click the Constraint tool and select the type of constraint to apply.

5. Additional constraints being applied. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Click apply to create the constraint then continue to add additional constraints as required. All Rights Reserved 339 . 6. If necessary adjust the solution option and enter an offset or angle value. Inc.4.

the selection1 and selection2 buttons are automatically activated. Refer to the section below for available solution options for each. Each are designed to create a certain constraint condition between the components in the assembly. The offset or angle value is calculated based upon the 340 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Procedure Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut C Place Constraint Dialog Box Type: Select the type of constraint to create. enabling you to preview the constraint and confirm or change the constraint settings. click the appropriate selection button and reselect the geometry. Pick Part First: This option limits the feature selections to the selected part. then select the feature for the constraint. this option automatically inserts the angle or offset value if the offset field is blank. Preview Constraint: This option previews the constraint before applying. The components will move into position. If you need to change a selected feature. Solution: Each constraint type offers different solutions. Selections: As you select features. Predict Offset and Orientation: Only available for Mate and Angle constraints. Enter a value for the offset or angle of the constraint. Offset/Angle: The label for this field will change depending on the type of constraint you select. This option is usually used in situations where the feature you are attempting to constrain is obstructed by other parts in the assembly. You must first select the part.Basic Constraints There are four basic assembly constraints.

axes. Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . Mate Constraint You use the mate constraint to mate selected geometry. This is useful in applying constraints without moving the geometry from its current position. To override this setting.part's current position and is inserted into the offset/angle field. You can also enter an offset value to offset the geometry. Solution Options: Mate: Selected geometry will be mated to each other. Inc. planes. Flush: Selected faces will be coplanar. All Rights Reserved 341 .Face/Face Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Valid selections include faces. The following represents examples using the Mate constraint. and points.Axis/Axis Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . edges. enter the offset/angle value manually.

Solution Options: Directed Angle: Using this solution option.Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . planes. This helps resolve situations in which the component's orientation flips during a constraint drive or drag.Face/Face Angle Constraint Use the angle constraint to specify an angle between faces. or lines.Point/Point Mate Constraint/Flush Solution . the angle is measured by using the right-hand rule. Angle Constraint .Face/Face 342 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Undirected Angle: This is the default solution and it allows either orientation of the angle constraint.

Circular Face: Insert Constraint Use the insert constraint to insert a circular part feature into another circular part feature. Tangent Constraint/Outside Solution . Inc. Aligned: This solution will align the face normals. All Rights Reserved 343 . Outside: Creates an outside tangent solution. The center point of the edge is calculated and the result is a constraint in which the center lines are aligned and the selected edges are made coplanar. Solution Options: Inside: Creates an inside tangent solution.Circular Face . Insert Constraint Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This requires the selection of two circular edges.Tangent Constraint Use the tangent constraint to define a tangency condition between one circular feature and plane or face. or between two circular features. Solution Options: Opposed: This solution will force the face normals to be opposed.

each part or origin feature is associated with one-half of the constraint.Position View When you create assembly constraints. Each constraint is listed twice in the browser. If you need to edit. or delete a constraint. If you select a constraint in the browser it will highlight the geometry referenced by the constraint. when the browser is in the default Position View. Procedure Constraint Geometry Highlighted Browser . Viewing Assembly Constraints in the Browser 344 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . you can access the constraint under either part. This image displays how the assembly constraint appears under each part that it has been applied. for example. suppress.Viewing Constraints After you create the assembly constraints you can view them in the browser different ways.

Browser - Modeling View
If you change the browser view to Modeling View, the constraints appear under the Constraints folder. You can expand the folder to access the constraints. Using this view places all the constraints in one location however, it can be difficult to identify constraints on specific parts in larger assemblies.

Assembly Constraints in Browser - Modeling View

Shortcut Menu Options
In the browser, if you right-click on a constraint the following shortcut menu is displayed. Find in Window: Zooms the current view to geometry containing the selected constraint. This assists you in identifying the constraint graphically. Other Half: This option highlights the other half of the constraint, by expanding the other component to which it has been applied and highlighting the constraint. This option helps identify which components the constraint has been applied to.

Constraint Shortcut Menu Options

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

345

Editing Constraints
You can edit the constraint much the same way you edit placed features. Locate the constraint in the browser, then right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Edit.
Procedure

Editing Constraints

When you edit a constraint, all edits are done in the same dialog box used to create the constraint. All options can be changed including the type of constraint.

Editing Constraints

346

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Changing the Constraint Offset/Angle Value
There are two methods to change the constraint offset/angle value without using the Edit Constraint dialog box. • Using the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser: Selecting a constraint will cause the Edit Box to appear at the bottom of the browser. Enter a new offset/angle value for the constraint and press ENTER.

Using the Edit Dimension dialog box: In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Modify. The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. Enter a new offset/angle value and press ENTER or click the green check mark.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

347

Using ALT -Drag to Place Constraints
The ALT-Drag method is an alternate method for placing assembly constraints. Hold the ALT key down, then click and drag on the feature receiving the constraint. A constraint glyph will appear indicating the type of constraint being applied. Continue to drag the cursor to another part in the assembly and touch another valid feature. Then release the mouse button to create the assembly constraint.
Procedure

ALT-Drag Constraint Glyph

ALT-Drag Constraint Types
When you use the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints, the constraint type is based upon the geometry you select. You can change the constraint type by pressing the appropriate key. Release the ALT key but you must continue to hold down the left mouse button. • Mate: M or 1 • Angle: A or 2 • Tangent: T or 3 • Insert: I or 4

348

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

ALT-Drag to Place Constraints - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for using the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints. 1. While holding the ALT key, select the feature to be constrained and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the part. You can release the ALT key but you must hold the mouse button down.

2.

While holding the mouse button down, drag the part to the next feature to assign the constraint and release the mouse when the part is in place.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

349

Exercise: Constraining Components
In this exercise, you use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to constrain components in the assembly. After you apply the constraints you will edit some constraints to see the effect on the assembly.
Print Exercise Reference

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:
1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Constraining Components

2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

LCD-Mount Assembly

350

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Adaptive Components
Overview Overview

Overview
Adaptivity is intended to give the designer a way to create parts that can adapt to the assembly in which they are being used. Historically, parametric modeling systems required the use of complex cross-part parametric equations in order for one part to change size if another part in the assembly changed. One problem with this technique, is that cross-part parametric equations could become so complex, that even the original designer could have problems managing the relationship and equations used in such an environment. With the introduction of Adaptivity, Autodesk Inventor enables the designer to create adaptive relationships between parts in an assembly, that do not require the use of complex cross-part parameters. Largely based upon assembly constraints, Adaptivity enables a part to change based upon changes in other parts in the assembly to which it has been constrained. Furthermore, with Autodesk Inventor you can mix both Parametric dimensions and adaptivity within the same part and/or assembly. Thus, you can control the design intent by using the most appropriate technique. Although an in depth discussion of Adaptivity is beyond the scope of the course, you will learn the essential aspects of creating adaptive assemblies using Autodesk Inventor.

Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to • • • Understand adaptive features and how you use them Create adaptive features and sketches Use adaptive occurrences in an assembly and control them with constraints
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

351

Introduction to Adaptive Features
Adaptivity is not intended to be used in all parts and assemblies. The key to using adaptive features effectively is knowing when to use them.
Concept

When you create a part containing adaptive features, their size is allowed to change when the assembly conditions require them to do so in order to successfully resolve constraints and associative sketches. You can use different approaches to create adaptive features, for example, you can design the part outside of the assembly and make specific features adaptive for later use, or create a part in the context of the assembly, and project geometry from other parts in the assembly, to automatically create adaptive features. In the example below, the gasket component was created by using an adaptive crosspart projection from the flange component. By changing dimensions on the flange component, the gasket features change to match the changes on the flange.

Adaptive Component - Before and After

Identifying Adaptive Parts and Features
Parts and features are identified in the browser with an adaptive icon indicating the adaptive status. It must be present at each level in order for adaptivity to function. At minimum you will have two adaptive indicators: (a) at the part level in the assembly, and (b) at the feature level. The adaptive indicator only appears at the sketch level if the sketch contains associative geometry or has been set to be adaptive.

352

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

When to Use Adaptive Features
The following list represents some of the occasions to use adaptivity. • • • Your part contains features that are largely dependent for size or position, with other parts in the assembly. Your parts share common sketch geometry such as mating flanges. You need an easy way to update parts in the assembly when changes are required.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

353

Methods for Creating Adaptive Features
There are two methods available for creating adaptive features. The method you choose depends upon the design intent and which aspects of the geometry needs to be adaptive. While some adaptive features may only require certain parameters, such as extrusion distance, to change others may require the underlying sketch geometry to change as well.
Procedure

Using an associative reference sketch to create a feature. When you create parts in the context of the assembly, you can project geometry from other parts onto the current sketch. Depending upon the current Application Options settings, this geometry will either be associative reference or static. When the result of the geometry you project is associative reference geometry, the sketch is automatically set to be adaptive and any changes to the originating geometry will reflect in the reference geometry. To access this setting, on the Tools menu, click Application Options and click the Assembly tab.

Use Associative Reference Sketches to • Create a new component with features that need to mate with other features in the assembly. • Create a new component with features whose size and position are dependent upon the features of other parts in the assembly. For example a flange and end cap. • Create features that mate with a zero clearance. Create an underconstrained feature, and then make it adaptive. You create the sketch geometry and intentionally leave the geometry underconstrained. In order for a sketch feature to adapt, it must be underconstrained specifically on the elements of the sketch that you require to be adaptive. After you create the feature, in the browser, right-click on the

354

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Creating mating features and control assembly clearances with constraint offset values. Each feature you create has specific properties can be set as adaptive.feature and click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Assign specific feature properties as adaptive. • Sketch (must be underconstrained) • Hole Depth • Nominal Diameter • Counterbore Diameter • Counterbore Depth Any or all of these features can be set as adaptive in the Feature Properties dialog box. Create adaptive relationships before you know which parts in the assembly you will constrain the adaptive features to. Use Underconstrained Adaptive Features to • • • • • Create adaptive relationships with 2D layout sketch geometry. All Rights Reserved 355 . Inc. Adapt a feature to a component in another assembly level. a hole feature has the following properties that can be set as adaptive. For example. Create adaptive relationships when there is no existing geometry to project.

Open or create an assembly containing at least one part. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and activate the sketch to receive to associative reference geometry. If changes to the flange's sketch geometry occur. click the Assembly tab and confirm that the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling is selected. click the Project Geometry tool and select the edges or loops to be projected onto the new 356 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . on the Panel Bar. the Adaptive-Gasket's base feature sketch geometry is projected from the underlying flange part. If the originating geometry changes. On the Tools menu.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive sketches. 3. In the Options dialog box.Adaptive Sketches You create adaptive sketches by projecting cross-part geometry as associative reference geometry. With sketch activated. 1. click Application Options. they will be automatically reflected in the projected adaptive sketch. the changes are automatically reflected in the referencing associative sketch. 2. Creating Adaptive Sketches . then click OK. Procedure Adaptive Sketch Example In the image above.

6. 5. If necessary make changes to the original part and view the changes reflected in the adaptive part. The projected geometry will appear on the sketch and in the browser as an adaptive reference. select the edges specifically. to project a loop. select a point inside the edges. 4. To project single edges.part. Inc. Use the projected sketch geometry to create the required sketched features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 357 .

the adaptive part is driven through a series of updates and changes in size. The options available will depend upon the type of feature selected.Adaptive Features You create Adaptive features by leaving certain aspects of the feature underconstrained. By leaving the geometry underconstrained. The feature properties dialog box contains an Adaptive section enabling you to determine which aspects of the feature are allowed to adapt. such as an extrusion distance. adaptive. or by making specific feature properties. Using Mate and Flush assembly constraints. Adaptive Feature Example In the browser. right-click on a feature and select Properties on the shortcut menu. You do this by leaving dimensions and/or constraints off of sketch geometry. the adaptive part is created with the initial sketch intentionally underconstrained. Feature Properties Dialog Box 358 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . it is able to adapt to other features based upon assembly constraints. Procedure In the image below.

In the browser. Create a new part in the assembly with an underconstrained sketch.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive features. 3.Creating Adaptive Features . right-click on the feature and select Adaptive from the shortcut menu. 1. Create the part as required using standard sketch features. All Rights Reserved 359 . Inc. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

6. click Application Options. In the Options dialog box. 360 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . On the Tools menu.4. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. Setting Initial Adaptive Feature Status Note You can set part features to be adaptive automatically as soon as they are created. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. click the Assembly tab and select the Features are initially adaptive option. The adaptive part will update to validate the assembly constraint. 5. Add assembly constraints according to the design intent.

it cannot be used adaptively in this assembly. All Rights Reserved 361 . Because it is used adaptively in the AdaptiveOccurrences. the part's adaptive status is not initially set. Procedure When you constrain the adaptive part to fixed features on other components.ipt. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. caused by adaptivity.iam file. the under constrained features on the adaptive part will resize to validate the assembly constraints. changes to the Pin-A component forced by adaptivity in the first assembly. in this example. As a result.iam file. In the Adaptive-Occurrence. right-click on the part. In an assembly containing multiple occurrences of an adaptive part. If you require the same part to be adaptive in multiple assemblies. or other modifications. Any changes made to the adaptive occurrence will be automatically reflected in other occurrences. The image below represents two assembly files.Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies When you add a part to an assembly that was created outside of the assembly and contains adaptive features. When a component is being used adaptively in one assembly. will be reflected in every assembly in which the part is used.iam file. In the Tri-Assembly. in the browser or graphics window. the same Pin-A component is being referenced. To set the part as adaptive. only one occurrence can be specified as adaptive. It is important to note that any changes to the adaptive part. then click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. All other occurrences in the assembly will update to reflect the adaptive changes. Inc. each containing a reference to the PinA component. the Pin-A component no longer fits the hole size of the Tri-Base. it cannot be used adaptively in another. Also. you can use the Save Copy As command and save the part with a unique name for each adaptive occurrence you require in other assemblies. are also reflected in the second assembly. note that only one occurrence of the Pin-A component is set to be adaptive.

When this message appears. the constraint will be validated automatically. After you resolve the adaptive issue. This step is critical for performance. Cancel or Accept the message. and sketch geometry. For each adaptive part in an assembly. Common Assembly Constraint Error Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity The following list represents some tips and consideration for using Adaptivity. then performance could be seriously effected. additional processing is required. assembly performance can be effected. Depending on the complexity of the assembly and parts. When you apply assembly constraints to adaptive components. Procedure • • Adaptivity is not intended to be the cure all for all cross-part design challenges. or a constraint or dimension is preventing the adaptive change to occur. After the adaptive changes have been applied. Although the message does not give details about the specific problem. An adaptive change will only occur when there are no remaining degrees of freedom that can be used to validate the constraint. as any changes to a feature will force Autodesk Inventor to evaluate the adaptivity. Procedure The image below represents a common error that can occur when you apply constraints to adaptive components. If you click Cancel. the constraint will be saved in an error state. the component will move according to the remaining degrees of freedom before it adapts. If your assembly contains hundreds (if not thousands) of parts. when you use adaptive parts. turn off the adaptive status of the part in the assembly. and investigate the adaptive component's features. you will have to reapply the constraint. • 362 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . If you click Accept.Applying Assembly Constraints You apply Assembly constraints to adaptive parts the same way you apply constraints to non-adaptive components. it means that either some aspect of the feature's properties is not specified to be adaptive.

From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Adaptive Components In this exercise. Inc. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 363 . The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you will create three adaptive components in the assembly using both associative reference edges and adaptive features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. You will then modify the AdpReservoir component and view the effects on the adaptive components in the assembly. click Exercise: Adaptive Components 2.

You will also learn to perform different surface analyses on parts as well as using the Find option in the open dialog box to locate components based upon certain search criteria. In this lesson you will learn to analyze the assembly for interference between parts. and finding existing components. Completed Interference Analysis Objectives After completing this lesson.Assembly Analysis Overview Overview Overview There are different tools available to assist you in analyzing components that are used in an assembly. you will be able to • • • Analyze components in the assembly for interference Analyze faces on the part using the Zebra Style analysis Locate components using the Find option 364 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

All Rights Reserved 365 . Including components in this set is optional. The Analyze Interference tool enables you to check for interference between components in the assembly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When the interference analysis is performed. the interference will not be detected.The Analyze Interference Tool As you design components for your assembly. If you define both sets and components within the same set interfere with each other. Pull Down Menu Tools > Interference Analysis Dialog Box Define Set #1: Click this button then select the components to include in the first set. To check for interference by comparing each component to each other component. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Inc. Define Set #2: Click this button then select the components to include in the second set. you may need to determine whether or not components in the assembly interfere with each other. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #1. select all components for Set #1 and leave Set #2 empty. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Interference tool. components in Set #1 are checked for interference with components in Set #2. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #2.

2. 366 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Open an assembly. You can copy this information to the clipboard and then paste it into another application. click Analyze Interference and select the components to be included in Set #1. the Interference Detected dialog box appears. indicating the components and locations of interference.If interferences are detected. You can also print it for further review.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for analyzing the assembly for interference between components. On the Tools menu. 1. Interference Detected Dialog Box Analyzing Interference .

Interference Between Threaded Holes and Standard Parts. If an interference is found. Inc. 4. Then click OK. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The areas of interference are indicated in red in the graphics window. use the major diameter option to create the threaded hole. You can expand the dialog box for more information and to copy and/or print the results. Tip To prevent interference between threaded holes and fasteners.3. Click the Define Set #2 button and select the components to be compared against the components in Set #1. the Interference Detected dialog box appears giving a total number of interferences and the total volume. All Rights Reserved 367 .

New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. Pull Down Menu Tools > Standard Toolbar Toggles the analysis display on/ off. thickness of the stripes. Procedure Each style is designed to perform specific analysis and will present the results of the analysis in a unique way. 368 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You use this style to check the continuity between surfaces.The Analyze Faces Tool The Analyze Faces tool offers two different analysis styles. click the arrow button to select the part or faces. You use the Zebra Analysis to analyze consistency between faces and use the Draft Analysis style to analyze the suitability of a part for casting. and opacity of the pattern. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Faces tool. Zebra Analysis The Zebra Analysis analyzes the selected part or faces by checking for continuity between surfaces. Analyze Faces Dialog Box .Zebra Analysis In the Style area click the left button to activate the Zebra Analysis. Selection: In the Selection area. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. In this lesson you will learn how to perform each of these analyses. Definition: Use these options to control the orientation of the pattern.

90 degree angles can cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. Click OK or Apply to display the results. All Rights Reserved 369 . The Zebra Stripes make a uniform transition from one face to the other. The colors represent the draft angle range between angles specified. Analyze Faces Dialog Box . The Draft Analysis style analyzes the selected part or faces and presents the results in a range of colors on the selected part or faces. Face drafts are generally used to alleviate this problem by applying slight draft angles between faces. indicating surface continuity. the selected faces are being analyzed for continuity along their common edge. Draft Analysis You use the Draft Analysis style to check the suitability of a part for casting. When you design parts for casting. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. the Zebra Stripe pattern would indicate this with a non-uniform transition from one face to the next.Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis.Draft Analysis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. If there were gaps between the selected faces. In the example above.

Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. the a draft analysis as been performed on the selected faces. In the example above. Faces represented in Blue or Green. In the Selection area. have acceptable draft angles. while Red indicates 0 degree draft angles which could cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. The green areas indicate safe draft angles while the red areas indicate 90 degree conditions.In the Style area click the right button to activate the Draft Analysis. Definition: Enter the draft angle range to use for the analysis. Click OK or Apply to display the results. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. You can define individual selection sets with separate pull-directions. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. The color ranges from blue (negative angle specified) to red (0 degree draft angle) to Green (positive angle specified). 370 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click the arrow to define. Selection: In the Selection area click the arrow button to select the part or faces. and if necessary flip the pull direction for the current selection set.

You then select the appropriate condition and if necessary. provide a value. Both tools function the same way. Click the Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Open Dialog Box Edit Menu (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only. Inc. You create the search criteria by selecting the property from the Property drop-down list. the only difference is that the latter only searches the active assembly file. and highlights and selects the matching components in the browser. You can create different searches by defining criteria based upon various file properties and save these custom searches for later use. Find Find CTRL+F The main window in each of these dialog boxes lists the current search criteria.Locating Components You can use the Find tool to locate files or components within the active assembly. All Rights Reserved 371 . The Find Assembly Components dialog box is accessed by clicking Find on the Edit menu. You access the Find: Autodesk Inventor Files dialog by clicking the Find button on the Open dialog box. Access Methods Use the following methods to access tools for locating files Autodesk Inventor files. while working in the context of the assembly. Keyboard Shortcut (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only. Procedure There are two slightly different versions of the Find dialog box.

Find Assembly Components 372 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You use this tool for large assemblies. and the Open Search button to load previously saved searches. then click Find Now to search for components in the active assembly that meet the defined criteria. then click Find Now to search for Autodesk Inventor files that meet the criteria defined. Find Autodesk Inventor Files Dialog Box Build and optionally save the search criteria. Components that meet the criteria will be highlighted in the browser. where it would be difficult to manually locate components in the browser. Use the Save Search button to save the search for later use. Build and optionally save the search criteria.Add to list button to add the criteria to the main window list.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Assembly Analysis 2. Completed Interference Analysis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to perform an interference analysis on an assembly.Exercise: Assembly Analysis In this exercise. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 373 . You will use the Analyze Faces tool to analyze faces on a part file and complete the exercise by using the Find tool to find various files.

In this lesson you will learn to create exploded views and animations. • The Presentation file is stored as a separate *. Visualize the interaction between parts in the assembly by animating the exploded view to show the assembly's transition between the assembled and exploded states. If you require exploded views in your drawing you will first need to create the exploded view in a Presentation file. You can also use the Presentation environment to: • Help explain and visualize components in the assembly that would otherwise be obstructed from view when the assembly is shown in its assembled condition. you will be able to • • • Create a Presentation View Create Tweaks and Trails in a Presentation View Animate a Presentation View 374 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Assembly Exploded View Objectives After completing this lesson.ipn file which references the assembly and part files for the geometry.Presentations Overview Overview Overview You use Presentations files to create exploded views of the assembly.

Default templates are available for Presentation files. but you can only reference one assembly in each Presentation file. Presentation Environment Creating a Presentation View You use a Presentation View to create exploded views of the assembly. Presentation Environment The Presentation Environment is similar to the part modeling and assembly environment. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.ipn file. The Panel Bar contains the tools you use to create the Presentations. on the New fly-out menu. There is no limit to the number of presentation views you can create. the graphics window displays the assembly geometry you use in the presentation views. All Rights Reserved 375 . and the browser displays view names and other information relevant to the Presentation environment.Creating a Presentation Before you create a Presentation View. Inc. select Presentation. you must create a Presentation File. You store the Presentation in an *. Procedure On the Standard toolbar.

Click the browse button to browse for a different design view file. will be moved automatically. This option is only available if you select Automatic.Access Methods Use the following methods to access to Create View tool. Panel Bar When you select the Create View tool. Design View: Select the Design View to use as the basis for the Presentation View. it will be listed automatically in the File field. Only components with certain assembly constraints such as Mate. Create Trails: This option will create trails indicating the path of each component from its assembled position to the exploded position. 376 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Automatic: This option creates the exploded view by automatically moving the components in the assembly based on the distance you enter in the Distance field. You explode the view later by adding tweaks to move each component. Manual: This option creates the Presentation View without exploding the assembly components. the Select Assembly dialog box is displayed. Select Assembly Dialog Box File: If you already have an assembly file open. you will need to enter the path for the assembly or select the browse button to browse for the assembly file. and Insert. Explosion Method: Select the explosion method from the following options. If you do not currently have an assembly file open. Distance: Enter an explosion distance to move each component.

On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.The image below represents a typical presentation containing two Presentation Views. Inc. 2. Each Presentation View is displayed in the browser. To activate a view. The view names listed here are the same view names available to create a 2D drawing view later. You can expand it to display the assembly components. click the Create View tool. 1. Accept the default Design View or select one from the drop-down list. All Rights Reserved 377 . select the Automatic explosion method and enter a distance in the Distance field. Presentation View Creating a Presentation View . click the Create Trails option. If necessary you can rename the view by performing a slow double-click on the name in the browser. Create a new Presentation file. Other options are available for filtering the information presented in the browser.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a Presentation View. enter or browse for the assembly file to use in the Presentation View. then click OK to create the Presentation View. In the Select Assembly dialog box. To create trails on the components. To automatically explode the components. double-click on the view in the browser.

378 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . The Presentation View is created accordingly and appears in the Presentation Browser. enter a new value in the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser. Expand the view to see the components and tweaks automatically applied. If you need to edit the tweak. Continue to create presentation views as required.3. 4.

Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Tweak Components tool. Even if you have chosen the automatic explosion method. which represent a path from the components current location after tweaks have been applied. The direction does not have to be defined from a feature on the part you tweak. Trails help clarify how a component in an exploded view fits into the overall assembly. Select a face or edge on any component to display the Triad icon. When the tweaks are created you also have the option of displaying the trails. you may need to add tweaks to the components to move them to new locations in the exploded view. to its assembled location.Creating Tweaks and Trails After you create the presentation view. The blue axis indicates the current transformation axis. All Rights Reserved 379 . Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut T Tweak Component Dialog Box Direction: Click the Direction button to define the direction of the tweak. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you can select elements of the triad to control the transformation. Once the direction triad appears. most exploded views will require manual tweaks. Procedure When you tweak a component you can move and/or rotate the component in any direction. Inc.

Transformations: In the Tweak Component dialog box. deselect it by holding down the CTL key and reselecting the component. Inadvertently selecting a point over a component will add that component to the tweak. Enter a distance or angle value for the tweak and click the green check mark button. If you select a component by mistake. 380 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .You can switch the active direction by: • • Choosing another axis in the Tweak Component dialog box. Trail Origin: Click the Trail Origin button to select a different trail origin. in the Transformations area you can set the transformation options for the tweak. Y. Note: When you drag the tweak distance. start dragging the distance with the cursor away from existing components. This option enables you to move the component along the selected axis. or Z here is the same as selecting each axis on the triad in the graphics window. Clicking the X. Components: Click the Components button to select the components to tweak. You can select the option to move or rotate the component. Selecting the axis on the Triad to make it current. Display Trails: Select this option to display trails showing the path of the tweak. You can use the value field for tranlational and rotational tweaks. This option enables you to rotate the component around the selected axis.

Edit Existing Trail: Click the Edit Existing Trail button to edit an existing trail. Create a Presentation View. click the Tweak Components tool and select face or edge to define the tweak direction. Inc. Creating Tweaks and Trails . By rotating the triad. This option is only available when the rotational transformation is selected. Close: Click to close the dialog box.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating tweaks and trails. On the Panel Bar. Clear: Click to clear the current tweak and continue adding tweaks. click the green check button to finish tweaking the triad. All Rights Reserved 381 . 3. 2. You will select the trail then adjust the tweak value. In the same area. 1. you can tweak the component in different angles. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Select the components to be included in the tweak. Triad Only: Select this option to rotate the triad only.

Confirm the Transformation settings then click and drag in a blank area of the screen. click Close. Click Clear to apply the tweak and continue. Select the components to include in the tweak. Click and drag in a blank area of the graphics window and then click Clear to apply the tweak and continue. 382 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 6. 7. 5. Select a face or edge to define the direction. and confirm the transformation direction. Repeat the steps above to continue tweaking components. When finished.4.

Animating a Presentation View After you create the Presentation View. Animation Dialog Box Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can record the animation to a standard AVI format for use on other computers. Panel Bar After you start the Animate tool. it is possible to animate the explosion sequence and visualize the components in the assembly moving into or out of their assembled position. they appear as a group in the sequence list. All items in a sequence group are animated at the same time. or pause. In this lesson you will learn the basics for animating a Presentation View. rewind. in the Motion area. When you tweak multiple components at the same time. you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the animation sequence of the selected tweak. Inc. Select items in the list and use the Group and Ungroup buttons to move items in and out of sequence groups. Expand the dialog box to examine the tweak sequence. Procedure There are several options available to animate the presentation view. some of which are beyond the scope of this course. In the Animation dialog box. click Reset to reset the sequence back to the beginning. All Rights Reserved 383 . By default the animation will play in the reverse order that you applied the tweaks. use the standard player controls to play. After you play the animation. click the Record button to record the animation to an standard AVI file. If you select items in the sequence list. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Animate tool.

This will display the tweaks in the sequence order that will be played during the animation sequence. Using this view it is possible to drag and drop component tweaks from one sequence to another.Browser Sequence View Click the Filter button at the top of the browser and select Sequence View on the flyout menu. Browser Sequence View 384 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

you will create a new presentation file of an assembly. you will create an exploded view of the components and then animate that exploded view. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Presentations In this exercise. click Exercise: Presentations 2. Inc. After creating the presentation. Assembly Exploded View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 385 . click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals.

Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter to create the assembly pictured in the image below. click Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals 2. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. From the Main table of contents page. Completed Assembly Challenge 386 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Replacing existing components in the assembly. Potential outside sources of geometry not created with Autodesk Inventor. Creating Design Views to save custom views and display characteristics of the assembly. Creating new parts in the context of the assembly. Activating components and controlling the appearance properties of the browser. Perform several different assembly related operations using the assembly browser. Alternative methods for placing constraints on components in the assembly. Inc. • • • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Placing components in the assembly using the Place Component tool.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • • • • • What constitutes an assembly model and the overall process used to create them. All Rights Reserved 387 . Placing assembly constraints on components in your assembly. Methods for creating adaptive features and sketches and how to control the adaptive status of these features. The different approaches that can be used when creating assembly models and the environment and interface used as you create the assembly. Degrees of Freedom and how they effect each part in the assembly. Tips and considerations for using Adaptive parts in your assembly. Resequencing and restructuring an assembly. while understanding the potential effect on assembly constraints when doing so. Simulating motion in an assembly by driving constraints and temporarily repositioning components in the assembly by using the Move Component and Rotate Component tools. Projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly when creating new components. Using assembly based work features to constrain components and using parts consisting of only 2D geometry to validate design intent.

388 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

• • • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Create and edit broken views on your sheet. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • Create and utilize the available drafting standard to control properties of your drawing. Editing projected views and the options that are available. Retrieving model dimensions for use in the drawing. Placing reference dimensions on the sheet. Creating and editing broken views. Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing.Introduction to Drawings Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Create and edit detail views. Managing views and sections after they have been created. Creating and editing auxiliary views on your sheet. Create and edit auxiliary views on your sheet. Creating general types of annotation on your drawing. Create and edit section views. Creating and editing section views on your drawing. Creating base and projected views of your part or assembly files. Copy and/or move drawing views between sheets in the drawing.. Create base and projected views. you will be able to. Project isometric views from the section to create an isometric section view. Perform several functions involving drawing resources. Create and use text styles and dimension styles.. Creating detail views to magnify portions of your drawing view. Copying and/or moving views between sheets in the drawing. Creating and editing break out views as an alternative to standard section views... • Creating and utilizing the available drafting standards to control several properties of your drawing. Using various drawing resources. Creating and using text styles and dimension styles.

You use them to control the appearance of drawing features such as Balloons. drafting standards. BSI. and JIS. In this lesson you will learn how to use drafting standards to control the appearance of drawing features.Setting Drafting Standards Overview Overview Overview Autodesk Inventor software supports ANSI. GB. The default standard is determined by the option you select during installation and can be changed for each drawing. and Parts Lists. you will be able to • • • • Use Drafting Standards to control the appearance of drawing features Create and use text styles in your drawing Create and use dimension styles in your drawings Create drawing templates 390 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Weld Symbols. DIN. Drafting Standards and Styles Objectives After completing this lesson. ISO.

• • • • • • ANSI BSI DIN GB ISO JIS Access Methods Use the following method to access the Drafting Standards dialog box. Pull Down Menu Format > Drafting Standards Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can create a new standard or modify an existing standard for the current drawing. If you want the changes to be available to all new drawings. you must save the current drawing as template in your template directory. All Rights Reserved 391 . Inc.Drafting Standards You use the Drafting Standards dialog box to control several different drawing feature properties. modify them. Principle Default Drafting Standards The following list represents the available default drafting standards. When you create or modify drafting standards. the default drafting standard is determined by the options chosen during installation. or create a new standard based upon one of the default standards. the changes apply only to the current drawing. When you create a new drawing. You can use these standard as they are.

Several tabs.Drafting Standards Dialog Box Select the active drafting standard or click the Click to Add area to create new drafting standard based upon one of the existing standards. each containing different options for controlling properties stored within the drafting standard are available. Click the [>>] button to expand the Drafting Standards dialog box. Drafting Standards Dialog Box 392 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

• Sheet Tab: The options on this tab controls sheet specific properties such as labels and colors. All Rights Reserved 393 .Drafting Standard Properties Each tab in the Drafting Standards dialog box contains properties for drawing features that are stored within the drafting standard. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and line properties. view projection. • Common Tab: This tab controls common drawing properties such as default text style. • Terminator Tab: This tab controls the type and size of leader and dimension terminators. Inc.

The characters must be selected to be available for dimensions.• Dimension Style Tab: Select the active dimension style for the current standard. Unselected characters will not be available for dimensions. • Control Frame Tab: Use the options on this tab for Control Frame properties. Only the selected symbols will be available for GD&T features. 394 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

and Columns to be included. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. linetypes. and units. Heading. All Rights Reserved 395 .• Datum Target Tab: These options control Datum Target feature properties such as point size. • Parts List Tab: This tab controls Parts Lists properties such as Text Style.

• Balloon Tab: These options control properties for Balloon features such as Text Style. 396 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Balloon Type. • Hatch Tab: These options set the default hatch pattern for section views. and Offset Spacing. Only the selected Hatches will be available when you create new hatch areas or modify existing hatch patterns. • Center Mark Tab: These options control the center mark properties.

• Weld Bead Recovery Tab: This tab controls the weld bead properties for weld features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.• Welding Symbols Tab: These options control weld symbol properties. All Rights Reserved 397 . Inc. Only the selected symbols will be available in the drawing. • Surface Texture Tab: These options control surface texture symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available when you place surface texture features.

enter a name for your standard. 2. Continue to modify other properties as required. In the Drafting Standards dialog box.Creating a new Drafting Standard . In the New Standard dialog box.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a new drafting standard. 398 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 3. click Drafting Standards. and select the base standard from the drop-down list. select the Click to add new standard area. Click OK to close the Drafting Standards dialog box. The new drafting standard will be listed among the default drafting standards and should appear selected in the Current column. 1. 4. On the Format menu.

All Rights Reserved 399 . and you want them available in other drawings.Text Styles You create and use text styles to control the appearance of text features for annotation objects in your drawings. all options will be grayed out. Access Methods Use the following methods to access Text Style related functions. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Pull Down Menu Standard Toolbar Text Styles Select to change the active text style. If you modify or create new text styles. you will need to save the current drawing containing the text style as a drawing template in your template directory. or apply a different text style to the selected text. Inc. If you select one of these text styles in the Text Styles dialog box. Different Text Styles Default Text Styles Note Within each drawing is a default text style for each drafting standard. Concept The image below represents the same text object with different text styles applied. These text styles are named DEFAULT-Standard Name and cannot be modified or deleted. Stored within the drawing. the default text style is set within the current drafting standard.

or enter a new value. select the size for the font. Line Spacing: In the drop-down list. Top. 180. 0. Only available for the Exactly. select the drafting standard to display text styles. select the text font for the style. %Stretch: Specifies the width of the text. or 90 degrees. Font: In the drop-down list. Underline). Format/Justification/Color: Select the options to control the format (Bold. Center. Standard: In the drop-down list. Style Name: Enter a name for the text style. select the line spacing for the text style. or Multiply options. Bottom) and color.Text Styles Dialog Box You can adjust the following properties for all but the DEFAULT-Standard Name text styles. Value: Enter a line spacing value. Justification (Left. Italic. 270. Rotation: Click to set the default rotation of the text. 400 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Size: In the drop-down list. Right. Middle.

2. then on the Standard toolbar. 1. All Rights Reserved 401 . select the Text Style. in the Style drop-down list. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Select an annotation object.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying a different text style to an annotation object. The selected annotation object updates to reflect the changes in the text style.Applying a different text style . Inc.

In order to make your custom dimension styles available for other drawings. Access Methods Use the following methods to access dimension style functions. The default dimension style is set in the current drafting standard and each drafting standard includes a number of predefined dimension styles. Pull Down Menu Standard Toolbar Format > Dimension Styles Select to set the active dimension style or change the dimension style of a selected dimension. Dimension styles are stored within the drawing. Concept The following image shows several dimensions applied to the geometry using different dimension styles. 402 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . you must save the drawing as a template or use the drawing orgranizer to copy dimension styles from an existing drawing to the current one. Each dimension contains a number of different properties that you can modify and save in a dimension style.Dimension Styles You create and use dimension styles to control the appearance properties of dimension objects in the drawing.

Select the dimension style to modify and adjust the properties as required. Dimension Styles Dialog Box Default Dimension Style Note Dimension styles named DEFAULT-Standard Name exist for each drafting standard and cannot be modified. Because the Style drop-down list is used for controlling other style related options. They can be used as the basis for new dimension styles by selecting the dimension style and clicking New. Using Dimension Styles As you create dimensions in your drawing. the dimension style is only displayed when one of the dimension tools is active. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 403 . the Style drop-down list reflects the current dimension style.The Dimension Styles dialog box contains several tabs. Inc. each with a unique set of properties that you can adjust.

The selected style will become the current dimension style until it is changed. Overriding Dimension Styles Dimension styles can be overridden by right-clicking on the dimension and then selecting Options or Tolerance on the shortcut menu. 404 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . As you place the dimension. the rule of thumb is: • • Override settings supersede the Dimension Style settings. When a setting being changed is common to one found in the Drafting Standards or the Dimension Style dialog boxes. it assumes the properties of the current dimension style.If you want to change the current dimension style. Dimension Style settings supersede the Drafting Standard settings. select a different style from the drop-down list.

To copy a dimension style. the overrides on that dimension will be lost. All Rights Reserved 405 . color styles and lighting but only contains options specific to the drawing environment. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Note Copying Dimension Styles The drawing organizer enables you to copy dimension styles from a source drawing to the current drawing. enter or browse for the path of the source drawing containing the dimension style. Select the dimension style(s) to copy and click the Copy button. The drawing organizer works exactly like the organizer for materials.Dimension Overrides If you apply a dimension style to a dimension containing overrides.

By saving the drawing as a template. text styles. dimension styles.Partial 406 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . • • • • • • • Drafting Standards Dimension Styles Text Styles Sheet Formats Borders Title Blocks Sketched Symbols Access Method Use the following method to create a drawing template. Options Dialog Box . Save your drawing in this location or a subfolder to make it available as a template when you create new drawings. determine the location for your template files. you can create new drawings based on the template which will contain the custom settings created earlier. Procedure The following list represents settings or properties that are saved within a drawing template.Drawing Templates After you modify and create custom drafting standards. you should save the drawing as a template. and other settings specific to your environment. Pull Down Menu File > Save Copy As Before you save your drawing file as a template. The File Tab of the Options dialog box contains a field setting for the template location.

click Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. and dimension style. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create a new drawing and define a new drafting standard. From the Main table of contents page. Drafting Standards and Styles Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You will then save the drawing as a template a create a new drawing using the new template. text style. 2. All Rights Reserved 407 . Inc.Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards In this exercise.

Features such as sheets. borders. Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources Objectives After completing this lesson. and views are all used to present information that meet typical drawing standards. you will be able to • • • • • • • Edit the default sheet by changing its size. title blocks.Drawing Resources Overview Overview Overview A typical Autodesk Inventor drawing contains several features that are not directly related to the 3D geometry they are used to represent. orientation and other options Create drawings containing predefined views by using Sheet Formats Create drawings containing multiple sheets Create sheet formats to enable you to easily create drawings containing predefined views Define a sheet border for use in future drawings Create a custom title block for use in future drawings Edit existing title blocks that are automatically placed on the drawing 408 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In this lesson you learn how to utilize the various drawing resources available in a typical drawing environment.

Size: Select a predefined sheet size or select the custom size option in the drop-down list. Orientation: Select a title block position option and the orientation of the sheet Portrait or Landscape. Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from the count and thereby not counted in the title block area showing the sheet number. enter a width for the sheet. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Exclude from count: By default each sheet is counted and its number displayed in the title block. Shortcut Menu Right-click on the sheet in the browser > Edit Sheet Edit Sheet Dialog Box The following options are available in the Edit Sheet dialog box. Exclude from printing: Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from printing when you select the All Sheets option in the Print Drawing dialog box.Editing the Default Sheet When you create a new drawing. Each sheet contains properties for size. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. enter a height for the sheet. Name: Enter a sheet name or accept the default. and title block position that you can edit. it is created with one default sheet. All Rights Reserved 409 . Procedure Access Method Use the following method to access the Edit Sheet tool. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. orientation.

right-click on the sheet and click Edit Sheet on the shortcut menu. Adjust the options as required in the Edit Sheet dialog box and click OK. In the drawing browser. 3.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing the default sheet. 410 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Editing the Default Sheet . 1. 2. The sheet in the graphics window and browser updates to reflect the new information.

All Rights Reserved 411 . A new sheet is created with the predefined views of the selected file. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Access Methods Use the following method to access pre-defined sheet formats. Procedure A sheet format is defined for common sheet sizes. Inc. the Select Component dialog box will appear. Double-click on a sheet format to create a new sheet using the pre-defined sheet size and views. In the drop-down list you can select from the list of currently open Autodesk Inventor files. or use the Browse button to browse for the file. is a Sheet Formats folder.Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout Included in each new drawing. You can expand this folder to expose predefined sheet formats to automatically create pre-defined drawing views. The view scale is set to 1 and may require editing after placement. Drawing Browser Selecting the Component When you double-click on the sheet format. located under the drawing resources folder in the drawing browser. Each sheet format will consist of one view based upon a predefined orientation such as Front and other projected views.

depending on the method chosen to create the new sheet. To activate a sheet. Procedure When you create a new sheet in the drawing. double-click on the sheet in the browser. you are not limited to the amount of sheets that can be included in a single drawing. Pull Down Menu Drawing Browser Keyboard Shortcut Insert > Sheet Right-click in a blank area and click New Sheet SHIFT + N 412 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . You can only view one sheet at a time. The latter result only occurs when creating a new sheet by right-clicking in the browser and selecting New Sheet on the shortcut menu. you will either be presented with the New Sheet dialog box or the sheet size and properties will be duplicated from the current sheet.Creating Multiple Sheets Although each new drawing is created with a single sheet. Access Methods Use the following methods to add new sheets to the drawing. The image below represents multiple sheets in the browser.

either Portrait or Landscape. All Rights Reserved 413 . or click Custom to enter a custom sheet size. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.New Sheet Dialog Box The following options are available in the New Sheet dialog box. Size: Select a predefined sheet size from the drop-down list. Orientation: Select the appropriate orientation option. enter a width for the sheet. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. Inc. enter a height for the sheet. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list.

sheet formats cannot be copied from another drawing using the Drawing Organizer. Procedure Custom sheet formats are stored in the current drawing. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Create Sheet Format tool. it will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the drawing browser. consider creating custom sheet formats. You can also define custom sheet formats that represent sheet sizes and view positions that are common to your drawings. If the drawings you create utilize the same view configuration and sheet size. After you create the new sheet format. Drawing Browser 414 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Unlike Dimension Styles and Text Styles. Save the current drawing as a template to have access to the sheet formats later.Creating Sheet Formats Each drawing contains predefined sheet formats that you can use to automatically create drawing views on a new sheet.

Create a drawing containing the sheet size and views common to other drawings that you create.Create Sheet Format Dialog Box Name: Enter a sheet format name and click OK. right-click on the sheet and select Create Sheet Format dialog box. All Rights Reserved 415 . 2. Creating Sheet Formats . In the browser. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating sheet formats. Inc.

Double-click on the sheet format to use it to create new sheets. 416 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .3. 4. Enter a descriptive name in the Create Sheet Format dialog box and click OK. Your custom sheet format will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the browser.

When creating a new border. All Rights Reserved 417 . expand the Drawing Resources and right-click on the Borders folder and click Define New Border on the shortcut menu. Inc.Defining a Border Procedure • Each drawing you create will contain a Default Border item listed in the Borders folder in the drawing browser. right-click in the graphics window and click Save Border on the shortcut menu. You can define a custom border for use on your drawings. After you create the border geometry. • • • Use standard sketching tools to sketch the border geometry. If you decide to create a custom border. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. consider these two items. • • Custom borders do not resize automatically if the sheet size changes. you should create a new sheet based upon the size the new border will be designed to fit. • Enter a name in the Border dialog box and click OK. The default border is used on all new sheets and can resize dynamically when the sheet size is changed. To define a new border.

Inserting a Border When you create a new drawing. After the border is deleted from the sheet. 418 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . To insert a different border. or add a new sheet to the existing drawing. double-click on it in the browser. you can double-click on a border in the Borders folder or right-click on a border and click Insert Drawing Border. it will automatically contain a border.• To use the new border. you must first delete the existing border from the sheet.

or Author. right click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The new title block will be displayed in the browser under the Title Blocks folder. the default title block definition displays standard sketch geometry and dimensions as well as different types of text. In the image below. Text between < > indicates a non-static text entity. Property fields are automatically populated based up file properties such as Part Number. You can include special text items such as Property fields or Prompted Entry fields in the title block. Enter a name for the new Title Block in the Title Block dialog box. After creating the geometry and text for the title block. Title blocks are stored within the current drawing. therefore you should save the file containing the drawing as a template in order to have access to the custom title block later.Defining a Title Block You can define custom title blocks for use in your drawings. while Prompted Entry fields are populated by prompting you for the values to use in the dialog box. Use standard sketch tools to create the geometry and text features for the title block. Double-click on the title block to use it on the sheet. Procedure To define a new title block. some static text while others are property fields. All Rights Reserved 419 . Inc. right-click on the Title Blocks folder and select Define New Border on the shortcut menu.

After the title block is deleted from the sheet. you can double-click on a title block in the Title Blocks folder or right-click on a Title Block and click Insert.Inserting a Title Block When you create a new drawing. To insert a different title block. or add a new sheet to the existing drawing. you must first delete the existing title block from the sheet. 420 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . it will automatically contain a title block.

All Rights Reserved 421 . Procedure Like other drawing resource items. In most cases the default title block will only require minimal modifications to include information required by your company. title blocks are stored in the current drawing so save the drawing as a template in order to have access to the revised title block at a later date. Access Methods Use the following methods to edit a title block.Editing Title Blocks Each drawing template will contain at least one default title block that will be placed on each new sheet in the drawing. Browser Browser Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

use the Property Field tool on the Panel Bar. 422 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 1. in order to include property fields or prompted entry items. In the browser.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing title blocks. Format Field Text Dialog Box Select the appropriate property type based upon the text element you are creating. For more information on these property types refer to the Autodesk Inventor software help system. Editing Title Blocks . right-click on the title block and select Edit Definition on the shortcut menu.When you add text elements to the title block. 2. Selecting this tool will display a different version of the Format Text dialog box as shown below. A new sheet containing the title block definition is displayed.

All Rights Reserved 423 . Add sketch geometry. Click Yes in the Save Edits dialog box. Changes to the title block definition are applied to the sheet and the title block definition in stored in drawing resources. Inc. Right-click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu.3. 5. 4. text. and property fields as required. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

From the Main table of contents page. you will use the features available in the drawing resources folder to perform common tasks in the drawing environment. Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources 424 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. 2. click Exercise: Drawing Resources The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Drawing Resources In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

In this lesson you learn how to create projected views of your part or assembly files. you will be able to • • • Create a base view Create projected views from the base view Edit orthographic views and understand how other projected views may be affected Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 425 . Assembly Drawing with Projected Views Objectives After completing this lesson.Projected Views Overview Overview Overview After you complete the 3D design of your part or assembly. Inc. The first step in creating production drawings is to create the required orthographic and isometric views. manufacturing will require dimensioned drawings in order to build your design.

you specify the file to be used for the view.Creating a Base View You create a base view to begin creating orthographic views. Panel Bar 426 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . those changes will reflect in the drawing. or presentation file is established. scale. assembly. The base view establishes the original view orientation and scale where the latter projected views will be based. Procedure When you create the base view. If the part geometry changes. the view is placed onto the sheet and an associative link between the drawing and the part. the view orientation. After you specify this information. and style. Access Method Use the following method to access the Base View tool. The image below is a base view of a part placed in the drawing.

Label: Enter a label for the view or accept the default view label.user design views. You select the Design View to use for the initial view creation. Move your cursor away from the dialog box to see a preview of the view before it is created. If multiple files are open. The view label is displayed in the drawing browser.Hidden lines are displayed. Show Scale: This option displays the scale on the sheet under the view. assembly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Design View: Available only when you create a view of an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Scale from Base: Not available when you create a base view. Show Label: This option displays the view label on the sheet under the view. Scale: Enter a scale or select a predefined scale on the flyout menu. If you have a part. You use standard view tools to define a custom view orientation. You use it when you edit projected views. All Rights Reserved 427 . Inc. it will be the default file listed. • Associative: When you create a view of an Assembly. Change View Orientation: Select this icon to open the model's 3D viewing window. Style: Select the rendering style for the view: • Hidden Line . this option makes the view associative to the design view.Drawing View Dialog Box File: Enter or browse for the file to create its view. Orientation: Select the orientation for the base view. you select them in the drop-down list. or presentation file open. Weldment: Available only when creating a view of an Autodesk Inventor weldment assembly. The standard view orientations are based upon the origin planes of the file you select. This option is not available for default.

click the Base View tool. 1. Enter or browse for the Autodesk Inventor file to create the view and adjust the options such as orientation.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a base view in the drawing.Hidden lines are removed. Left click on the sheet to place the view. The base view is placed on the sheet according to the options specified. scale.• • Hidden Line Removed . 428 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .View is shaded using the same colors used in the assembly or part file Creating a Base View . Create a new drawing. 3. and style. Shaded . 4. On the Panel Bar. 2.

Drafting Standards Projection Setting Note The description above is based upon a Third Angle projection setting in the Drafting Standards dialog box. I you right-click on a view and select Create View > Projected. All Rights Reserved 429 . First Angle projection method is also available. Inc. Procedure If you select the Projected View tool you must select the base view. All view positions are previewed by a bounding box prior to the views being created. When you create projected views. If you place the projected view to the right of the base view. and select create on the shortcut menu. the view orientation is automatically determined based upon its position on the sheet relative to the base view. It presents no options or dialog box.Creating Projected Views The Projected View tool enables you to create projected views from any existing view on the sheet. you drag the projected views to the desired position. it will generate a right-side projection of the base view. By default the following view properties are carried over from the base view: • • Scale Style (Orthographic Only) The following image represents a typical drawing with a base view and three projected views. If you place the projected view at an angle from the base view. right-click. it will generate an isometric view based upon the relative position from the base view. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. then after the view positions have been placed. then position each projected view.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating projected views. On the Panel Bar. A bounding box of the view will appear at the placement location.Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Projected Creating Projected Views . click the Projected View tool and select the base view. 430 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Move the cursor to the location of the projected view and left-click. 1. 2.

Inc. 4. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu. 5. The projected views are created based upon the positions selected on the sheet.3. Continue to select positions on the sheet for projected views. All Rights Reserved 431 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

If you change the scale factor on the base view. Drawing View Dialog . Depending on the type of view.Editing a Base View 432 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and click Edit View. all projected views with the Scale from Base option selected. however while editing a projected view. will update to reflect the new scale factor. Base or Projected. you can edit the view properties using the Drawing View dialog box. Editing a Base View While you edit a base view. On a projected view. Procedure When you edit a Base view. you can only change these properties if you clear the options Scale from Base and/or Style from Base. and the same rendering style. you can change the Scale and Style properties.Editing Projected Views After you create base and projected views. you can edit any option that is not greyed out. these properties are linked to the base view to ensure the same scale across views. Access Methods Use the following method to edit views. different options are available for editing.

All Rights Reserved 433 . Drawing Dialog Box . Clear the check mark for the Scale from Base and Style from Base options to change the view scale or rendering style.Editing a Projected View While you edit a projected view. you can edit any option that is not greyed out. Inc.Editing a Projected View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Projected Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Assembly Drawing with Projected Views 434 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Exercise: Projected Views In this exercise. 2. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. you will create a new drawing and place a base view and three projected views on the sheet.

Section Views Overview Overview Overview When you create drawings of parts and assemblies. All Rights Reserved 435 . are drawn with continuous lines with hatch patterns representing the section plane. In this lesson you learn how to create section views of part and assembly drawings. Completed Section Views Objectives After completing this lesson. Features that were obstructed or displayed as hidden lines. important internal details are sometimes obscured by other features or parts. Section views enable you to better visualize these important details by removing the parts or features that are obstructing the view. you will be able to • • • Create section views in the drawing Create section views of the assembly in the drawing while controlling which parts are sectioned Edit section views by modifying the section line and editing the hatch pattern Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

you pick a side of the current view for the section view. The section view is generated based upon the direction of sight in relation to the view being sectioned. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Section 436 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Creating Section Views You create section views with the Section View tool. you must have at least one view on the drawing on which the section line is drawn. After drawing the section line. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Section View tool. In order to create a section view.

and midpoints. 2D constraints are being inferred the same as when sketching in the 3D modeling environment.Section View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Section View dialog box. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Section Lines and Constraints When you draw the section line. endpoints. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. All Rights Reserved 437 . more difficult. This technique is the same used to prevent constraints from being inferred in the modeling environment. When creating the section line. Constraining the section line to elements in the drawing view assist you in accurate positioning of the section line. Label: Enter a label for the section view. you can hold the CTRL key down to prevent constraints from being inferred. You can constrain the sketch line to elements within the drawing view such as centers. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. but can also make moving the section line later. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the section view. Inc. Style: Select a rendering style for the view.

Follow the image sequence below to see the effect of constraints being inferred. Isometric Section View Tip You can use Projected View tool to project an isometric view from a section view the same way you would project a standard view. 438 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Sketch the section line. 1. 3. All Rights Reserved 439 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Section View tool and select the view to be sectioned.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating section views.Creating Section Views . Note: You can draw the section line in one or more directions. A red border will highlight the view. right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu. After drawing the section line. Inc. 2. On the Panel Bar.

adjust the section view options in the Section View dialog box and select a point on the screen to section the view.4. If necessary. 5. Drag the section view to one side of the view being sectioned. 440 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . The section view is created.

Procedure You create section views for assembly drawings using the same techniques as single part section views. Controlling Component Sectioning When you create a section view of an assembly drawing view. This can be done in the graphics window or in the browser.Assembly Section Views When you create section views of assembly drawings. You can also control which parts are sectioned. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. parts from the standard parts library are not sectioned. By default. you can control which components are sectioned by right-clicking on the view being sectioned and clicking Show Contents on the shortcut menu. Inc. All Rights Reserved 441 . each part in the assembly section view will be hatched with different properties for visual clarity as the section plane passes through each part. however you can manually turn on sectioning for standard parts.

This results in the assembly and parts being listed under the view in the browser. not the section view. you must turn off the section property on the view being sectioned. Parts appearing with a gray icon indicate that the parts visibility is currently turned off. To prevent a part from being sectioned. In order to prevent a component from being sectioned in the section view. Tip 442 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . After the contents of the assembly are displayed in the drawing browser. right-clicking on the components will present options on the shortcut menu. clear the check mark next to the Section option.

This will present the Sketch Panel Bar. All Rights Reserved 443 . Inc. Edit the sketch used for the section line. This can only be done on elements of the section line that are not constrained to drawing geometry. apply dimensions to the sketch geometry. This will present the Drawing View dialog box enabling you to edit the view in the same way to would edit other projected views. You can edit the section line by dragging elements of the section line to new positions.Editing Section Views After you create the section view. • • Constraint Drag the section line. enabling you to edit the sketch geometry in the same way you would edit sketch geometry in the modeling environment. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can apply/remove constraints. it can be edited a number of ways. Procedure • Right-click on the view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. modify the sketch geometry.

• Editing the hatch pattern. Right click on a hatch pattern in the section view. This will present the Modify Hatch Pattern dialog box. 444 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . enabling you to change the hatch pattern properties.

click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings.Exercise: Section Views In this exercise. After creating the section view. Completed Section Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. you will turn off sectioning for some components and edit the section by moving the section line and changing the hatch pattern applied to some components. you will create section views of the assembly. click Exercise: Section Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Inc. 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. All Rights Reserved 445 .

you magnify an area of the drawing while creating an associative link between the original view and the detail view. In this lesson you learn to create detail views. you will be able to • • Create detail views to magnify areas of your drawing Edit detail views 446 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Detail Views Overview Overview Overview As you create 2D drawings for manufacturing. changes in the original view. it may be necessary to magnify drawing areas to show small details. If the geometry being magnified. those changes also reflect in the detail view. and apply dimensions that would otherwise be difficult to clearly show. Drawing with Detail Views Objectives After completing this lesson. When you create a detail view.

when you place dimensions on geometry within the view. Procedure The resulting view is associated with the main view and any changes effecting geometry within the detail view will be automatically reflected in the detail view. The detail view will be positioned on the sheet at the selected point and will be scaled and labeled according to the options specified in the Detail View dialog box. Inc. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Detail Detail View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Detail View dialog box. All geometry contained within the detail view circle will be included in the detail view. you are prompted to select a view then select a start point of the fence. When you start the tool. After you select the start point. the dimensions will reflect the actual geometry size. Although the view is scaled. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Detail View tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Creating Detail Views You use the Detail View tool to create detail views of an existing view in the drawing. just like other scaled views. The start point of the fence is the center of the detail view. you are prompted to select a location for the view. After you select the end point of the fence. you drag the cursor away from the start point which will preview the detail view circle. All Rights Reserved 447 .

1. 2. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the detail view. on the Panel Bar. but do not click OK. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. adjust the options as required. Drag the detail view fence outwards and select a point that will include all required geometry within the fence circle and left click to designate the end point of the 448 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet.Label: Enter a label for the detail view. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Creating Detail Views . 3. Clicking OK will end the tool without creating the view.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating detail views. click the Detail View tool. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Select the view then select the center point of the detail view. With at least one view on the drawing. In the Detail View dialog box.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 4. 5. The detail view is created accordingly. All Rights Reserved 449 .fence circle. Inc. Position the detail view as required and left-click to place the view.

the detail view has been moved to a different area as well as resized. The Drawing View dialog box is displayed. It is also possible to edit the location of the view label located on the detail view circle. rightclick on the detail view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. Selecting the center grip point will enable you to move the fence circle. Movement of the label is restricted to be along the diameter of the circle. Procedure You can also edit the detail view by editing the fence circle used to define the area of the detail view. and style options.Editing Detail Views You can edit detail views in the same way you would edit other types of views. In the image below. enabling you to change the scale. label. while selecting a grip point on the circle will enable you to change the size of the fence circle and thereby effect the area included in the detail view. grip points will appear as shown in the image below. If you select the detail view fence and label on the main view. 450 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Click and drag on the label to place it in a new location along the detail fence circle.

Exercise: Detail Views In this exercise. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Drawing with Detail Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 451 . 2. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create and edit detail views. click Exercise: Detail Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

In this lesson you learn to create auxiliary views. Auxiliary views enable you to create additional views on the drawing that are projected at a perpendicular angle from the selected edge. This results in a view that is normal to the selected edge and therefore the features along that edge are represented correctly. you will be able to: • • Create auxiliary views Edit and/or realign auxiliary views 452 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views Objectives After completing this lesson.Auxiliary Views Overview Overview Overview When you create drawings of parts some features on the geometry are positioned in a way that they cannot be accurately represented based upon the standard planes of projection.

creating 2D views of these features results in the features not being displayed at an angle normal to the face or feature. you may not be able to clearly dimension and/or represent the features. When this occurs. All Rights Reserved 453 . Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Auxiliary Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Auxiliary View tool. As a result of the feature orientation. This situation generally occurs when features on the part lie alone planes other than the standard XYZ planes on the part.Creating Auxiliary Views Occasionally a situation may arise in the drawing in which some features cannot be accurately represented by the standard projection planes. Inc. Procedure To resolve this situation. you can use the Auxiliary View tool to create drawing views that are projected and an angle that is perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge.

Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. With at least one view on the sheet. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Creating Auxiliary Views . Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. on the Panel Bar. The Auxiliary View dialog box appears. 1.Auxiliary View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Auxiliary View dialog. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the auxiliary view. Adjust the options as required and select an edge in the view to base the auxiliary view on. 2. 454 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click the Auxiliary View tool and select the view.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating auxiliary views. Label: Enter a label for the auxiliary view.

All Rights Reserved 455 . Drag the auxiliary view to the desired location and left-click to position the view. 4.Note: By default. Inc. The auxiliary view is created accordingly. the scale value will be the same as the selected view. 3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Editing Auxiliary Views After you create the auxiliary view it can be edited in different ways. You can right-click on the view and select Edit View to use the Drawing View dialog box to make changes to the view just as you would other projected views. 1. you are free to move the auxiliary view anywhere on the sheet. 456 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . You can right-click on the view and select Realign Auxiliary Views to reselect the edge used to define the auxiliary view direction. Breaking the Auxiliary View Alignment One drawback to creating auxiliary views is that by restricting the view placement to be perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge. By breaking the alignment of the view. 2. You can now drag the auxiliary view to any location on the sheet. You can break the alignment of the view to position it differently on the sheet. finding a suitable placement on the sheet at these angles can sometimes be difficult. The following steps represent an overview for breaking the view alignment of an auxiliary view. Note the appearance of the view direction lines with labels matching the view label. Procedure 1. 2. 3. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Alignment > Break on the shortcut menu. In this lesson you learn how to break the view alignment and realign the auxiliary view.

Inc. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Realign auxiliary views on the shortcut menu. 2. The following steps represent an overview for realigning an auxiliary view. Select a different edge for the auxiliary view alignment. In most cases these dimensions and/or annotations will need to be repositioned. All Rights Reserved 457 .Realigning the Auxiliary View It is possible to realign the auxiliary view by reselecting the edge originally used in defining the view direction. One benefit to using this method to realign the view is that dimensions and annotations associated with the view will move with the view as it is realigned. 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Reposition and/or delete the dimension and annotations as required.3. Drag the auxiliary view to its new position and left-click to place the view. 458 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 4.

click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. From the Main table of contents page. Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 2. All Rights Reserved 459 .Exercise: Auxiliary Views In this exercise. Inc. you will create and edit auxiliary views on the drawing. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Auxiliary Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Broken Views Overview Overview Overview You use Broken views to shorten the view of elongated objects. In this lesson you learn to create broken views. You can use broken views when areas of the view can be removed without sacrificing the display of part features. Drawing Containing Broken Views Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • Use the Broken View tool to shorten elongated views Edit a broken view by moving the grip points defining the break 460 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Note the appearance of the break lines and the break symbol on the dimension.Creating Broken Views You create broken views by creating a base or projected view. slider to adjust the display scale of the break lines. When you create a broken view./Max. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Broken Broken View Dialog Box You can adjust the following options in the Broken View dialog box. Gap: Enter a value for the gap between break lines on the sheet. After you create the view to be broken. Procedure The image below represents a shift linkage rod displayed in a broken view format. If dimensions have been placed on the drawing. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Rectangular or Structural. Inc. All Rights Reserved 461 . Display: Use the Min. all parent or child views associated with the view being broken will also appear as broken views. The dimension value will always represent the actual length being dimensioned. you use the Broken View tool to break the view. Style: Select the break line style. the dimension lines will appear with a break symbol indicating the dimension is attached to a broken view.

462 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click the Broken View tool. Creating Broken Views . sets the number of structural break symbols along the break lines. vertical or horizontal. With at least one view on the sheet. 3.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating broken views. 2. 1. With the Broken View dialog box still open. Do NOT click OK. on the Panel Bar. Orientation: Click the desired orientation. Adjust the options in the Broken View dialog box as required. select the first and second break points. The area between these two points will be removed from the view. The view is broken and the area removed.Symbols: Available only when the Structural style is selected.

You use the Edit View tool to change properties such as Scale. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and Style.Editing Broken Views After you create the broken view you can edit it like other views. To decrease the effective area of the view. drag one break line over to the other side of the opposite break line. Labels. You can also resize the break by clicking and dragging on the break lines. This has the effect of increasing or decreasing the area being removed by the break. You can also edit the broken view using methods specific to broken views. All Rights Reserved 463 . the break lines can be selected and will appear with a grip point at the center of the view as shown here. Click and drag on the grip point to move the break to a new location. Inc. Procedure When you create a broken view.

click Exercise: Broken Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Broken Views In this exercise. you create and edit broken views of the shifter linkage part. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Drawing Containing Broken Views 464 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. 2.

you will be able to • • Create break out views to show internal part features Use different methods to edit a break out view Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.Break Out Views Overview Overview Overview Sometimes section views remove too much information. When you create a break out view. Drawing Containing Break Out Views Objectives After completing this lesson. All Rights Reserved 465 . you are cutting a window into the part or assembly to view features and/or parts that are obstructed by geometry. In this lesson you learn to create and edit break out views. or prevent important features on the outside of the part from being ideally represented. Break Out views can help to alleviate this problem by limiting the section view to an area encompassed by a sketch boundary and sectioned to a specified depth.

To do this you select the drawing view prior to selecting the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. the sketch must be attached to the drawing view. 466 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . But in the drawing environment you can place your sketch on the sheet. Procedure To create break out views.Creating Break Out Views Before you create a break out view you must sketch a closed profile representing the area to be cut from the view. it will appear nested under the view in the browser. You can create sketches in the drawing the same way you create sketches in the modeling environment. When you select the view it will appear with a green bounding box. As an indication that the sketch is attached to the view. There are two methods for selecting the view prior to creating the sketch. or attach it to a drawing view. Select the view in the drawing browser. • • Select the view on the sheet.

All Rights Reserved 467 . enter an offset value from the selected point. Inc. Optionally. Use standard sketching tools such as Lines. Depth: Select the following options in the drop-down list. Splines. and Circles to create the closed profile. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.After you create the sketch you create a closed profile representing the area to be broken out from the view. it will be automatically selected. You can select a point in the current view or an adjacent projected or parent view. From Point: Select a point to set the depth of the break out view. If only one closed profile exists. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Break Out Break Out View Dialog Box The following options are available on the Break Out View dialog box. Boundary: Select the sketch to use as the boundary for the break out view. on the Standard toolbar. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Break Out View tool. click Return to exit the sketch. After you create the close profile.

Show Hidden Edges: Temporarily displays hidden lines on a view in which they are not shown. this option will break though the part in the area enclosed by the boundary. Through Part: When you create a break out view on an assembly. Isometric Break Out View You can project an isometric view of a break out view in the same way you project other isometric views. This enables you to select geometry that is hidden to set the view depth.To Sketch: Select a sketch line in an adjacent view to set the break out view depth. To Hole: Select a hole in the current or adjacent view to set the break out view depth. Tip 468 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

All Rights Reserved 469 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Edit Sketch: In the browser. This will display the Break Out View dialog box enabling you to redefine how the view is created.Editing Break Out Views After you create the break out view. aside from the standard Edit View option on the shortcut menu. Procedure Edit Definition: Right-click on the Break Out View in the browser and click Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. right-click on the sketch used for the boundary to edit the sketch geometry. you can edit the break out view using two additional methods that are unique to break out views. Inc.

Exercise: Break Out Views In this exercise. you create a break out view of the part and then project an isometric view of the break out view. 2. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Break Out Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. After creating the views. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. you will edit the break out view. Drawing Containing Break Out Views 470 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

In this lesson you learn to manage drawing views and sections.Managing Views and Sections Overview Overview Overview As you create drawing it is often difficult to know exactly how many sheets will be required and exactly what the best position of the views will be. Drawing Containing Typical Views Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • Use the different methods available to align drawing views Delete a drawing view from the sheet Copy a view from one sheet to another Move views in the drawing from one sheet to another Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. often times the views need to be moved. It is important you become proficient with managing your drawing views. As you begin to apply dimensions and other annotations to the drawing. in some cases copied as well as deleted. All Rights Reserved 471 . Inc.

enabling you to move the view in any direction. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. but there may be times when you need to change the alignment of drawing views to make better use of the available area on the sheet. Procedure There are four options related to aligning drawing views.Aligns views In Position. 2. In Position . 472 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Break . Aligning Views Horizontally 1. right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Horizontal on the shortcut menu.Breaks the alignment between views. The Horizontal alignment option will align the selected view horizontally with another view on the sheet. To realign the two views horizontally.Aligns views horizontally.Aligning Views As you create drawing views they automatically align to the parent view from which they were projected. Vertical . Click the parent view for the alignment.Aligns views vertically. • • • • Horizontal .

In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. Aligning Views Vertically 1. The Vertical alignment option will align the selected view vertically with another view on the sheet. right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Vertical on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 473 . Click the parent view for the alignment. To realign the two views vertically. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. The horizontal view alignment is established. 2.3.

3. The In Position alignment option will align the selected view based upon an axis that is neither vertical or horizontal. The vertical view alignment is established. In Position Alignment 1. 474 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > In Position on the shortcut menu. To realign the two views in position. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken.

The In Position view alignment is established.2. All Rights Reserved 475 . Click the parent view for the alignment. Inc. 3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Procedure If you select a parent view for deletion.Deleting a View You can delete views from the sheet by right-clicking on View on the sheet or in the browser. and clicking Delete on the shortcut menu. 476 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Expand the Delete View dialog box and click the Yes/ No field in the Delete column. you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of any existing dependent views.

The view is copied onto the other sheet and appears in the browser with a new view name. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Copy Views between Sheets You can copy a view from one sheet to another by right-clicking on the view and clicking Copy on the shortcut menu. Inc. Procedure Double-click on the destination sheet and right-click on the sheet and click Paste on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 477 .

The selected view and all associated annotation is moved to the destination sheet. You can right-click on the views with shortcut icons and click Go To on the shortcut menu. The destination sheet is automatically activated.Moving Views between Sheets You can move a view from one sheet to another by dragging the view in the drawing browser. 2. click and drag on the view being moved to the destination sheet. Procedure 1. 478 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Note the change in appearance of the moved view in the browser. Look for the position indicator showing the position of the view in the browser. In the browser. to activate the sheet of the selected view. Parent or dependent views of the moved view appear with shortcut icons with each view name indicating the sheet on which they are placed.

2. All Rights Reserved 479 . click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Drawing Containing Typical Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: Managing Views and Sections In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. deleting. From the Main table of contents page. copying and moving views. Inc. you will manage the drawing views by aligning. click Exercise: Managing Views and Sections The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Dimensions Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn how to utilize model dimensions in the drawing and how to place general dimensions. There are several different ways to place dimensions on the drawing.Dimensioning a Drawing View Overview Overview Overview A requirement common to all drawings are dimensions. one of the first things you will do is begin to place the dimensions required to manufacture the part. After you place the drawing views. you will be able to • • Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing and understand the effect of editing these dimensions in the drawing Place dimensions on the drawing using different dimensioning tools 480 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

you place parametric dimensions on sketches and features. When you retrieve model dimensions. Select View: Select the view to retrieve the model dimension into. you can select the dimensions that you want to retrieve while leaving others off. Select Parts: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from the entire part. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you should utilize these dimensions on the drawing. Only required when you start the Retrieve Dimensions tool from the Panel Bar. Procedure The Retrieve Dimensions tool enables you to retrieve dimensions from the model for use in the drawing. When possible. Select Dimensions: Select the dimensions in the drawing view to retrieve. Inc. Select Source: Select Features: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from selected features. All Rights Reserved 481 . When you start the tool. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select > Retrieve Dimensions Retrieve Dimensions Dialog Box The following options are available on the Retrieve Dimensions dialog box.Retrieving Model Dimensions When you create your 3D model. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Retrieve Dimensions tool. You can do this on both part and assembly drawing views. you select a view for the dimensions. You can only retrieve those dimensions that were created on the same plane as the selected view. Only those dimensions that are selected will be retrieved.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for retrieving model dimensions into the view. On the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar.Retrieving Model Dimension . 2. Select the Part or Features to retrieve dimensions from. 482 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 1. click the Retrieve Dimension tool and select the view to retrieve dimensions into.

3. Inc. The image below shows the dimensions in the positions in which they were retrieved. Editing Model Dimensions After retrieving the model dimensions you may be required to edit the dimension's position. Only those dimensions that are selected here will be retrieved and placed in the view. Click OK to retrieve the dimensions and close the dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 4. All Rights Reserved 483 . Click and drag on the dimension value to adjust the dimensions position. Click the Select Dimensions button and select the dimensions in the graphics window to retrieve.

484 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Right-click on a model dimension in the drawing and select Edit Model Dimension on the shortcut menu.Represented below is the same area of the drawing after dragging the dimensions to new locations. Editing a hole dimension will present the following dialog box. This will present the same Edit Dimension dialog box as presented in the modeling environment. you have the option of editing model dimensions while in the drawing environment. Options available in the Hole Dimensions dialog box are based upon the options used when creating the hole feature. Changing Model Dimension Values If enabled during installation.

Proceed with Caution! Note When you edit model dimensions in the drawing.After changing the dimension value. Inc. the geometry will update and the new value is reflected in the retrieved dimension. All Rights Reserved 485 . Changing the dimension in the drawing environment will have the same effect as changing the dimension in the modeling environment. Constraints will be re-evaluated and the geometry will update in the 3D model and drawing to reflect the new value. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. it is important to clarify that you are indeed changing the parametric dimension of the model.

vertical. Place the dimension or select another line or point to dimension to.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview to placing different types of dimensions in the drawing environment.Placing Dimensions You place dimensions on the drawing using the same tool you use in the modeling environment. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut D Placing Dimensions . and aligned. Procedure You use the same dimension tool for all types of general dimensions. click the General Dimension and select a line or point being dimensioned. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool. 486 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2. radius. Autodesk Inventor will place the correct type of dimension based upon the geometry selected. These dimensions are associative and will update to reflect correct values if changes occur on the geometry where they were applied. 1. on the Panel Bar. the dimensions are nonparametric and do not control geometry size as in the modeling environment. To place a linear type dimension. When you place dimensions in the drawing. diameter. horizontal.

To dimension to an apparent intersection. To place a radial or diameter dimension. When the dimension preview is dotted. select a linear element. 6. Place the dimension on the sheet. before placing the dimension. 7. Inc. All Rights Reserved 487 .3. Use this dotted preview to space your dimensions uniformly on the sheet. then right-click Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Position the dimension on the sheet. you are currently at the default offset spacing for the dimension. To change the dimension type. 5. 4. right-click and select Dimension Type > Click Type of Dimension. select a circular feature.

9. 8. Extension lines to the apparent intersection are 488 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 10. Place the dimension on the sheet.and select Intersection on the shortcut menu. Select the next linear element to calculate the apparent intersection. Select the endpoint or another element to end the dimension.

automatically added. User placed text can be entered before or after the dimension value placeholder. Inc. you can edit the text to add text to the dimension. All Rights Reserved 489 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Right-click on the dimension and click Text on the shortcut menu. Editing Dimension Text When you place dimensions on the drawing. This will present the Format Text dialog box. The dimension value is indicated by <<>> characters and cannot be deleted.

Drawing Containing Dimensions 490 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2. you will retrieve model dimensions into the drawing and use the General Dimension tool to add dimensions to different views.Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View In this exercise. click Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page.

General Annotation Placement Overview Overview Overview Annotating a typical drawing generally consists of more than just adding dimensions to features. All Rights Reserved 491 . Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn to use additional annotation tools such as part lists and balloons when documenting your assembly. you will typically have other annotation requirements such as parts lists and balloons. When documenting an assembly. you will be able to • • • • • Use hole tables to annotate holes Annotate centerlines and centermarks using both manual and automatic methods Create note and leader based annotation to the drawing Add a parts list to the drawing to further annotate the assembly Add balloons to parts in the assembly drawing Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

accompanied by a typical hole table.Selection .Selected Type .Annotating Holes Aside from standard dimensions to annotate hole placement. Panel Bar 492 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Hole Position. When you place a hole table on your drawing. Procedure Three different versions of the Hole Table tool are available: • • • Hole Table . you can also use Hole Tables to annotate the location and size of holes in a drawing view. there are three main elements: (a) Hole Tags.View . Hole Table . Although the use of each of these tools will result in a Hole Table. and Size of each hole. The image below represents an example of a drawing view containing a series of holes. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole Table tools.Creates a Hole Table based upon the holes you select. each version of the tool enables you to select the holes to include using a different method. which are placed next to each hole. and (c) the Origin Indicator which identifies the 0.0 location from which the hole locations are measured. Hole Table .Creates a Hole Table based upon all holes in the view. (b) the Hole Table containing a row for each hole including the Hole Tag.Creates a Hole Table of only those holes that are identical to the selected hole.

Inc. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create.Selection tool. 3.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table . 1. 2. click the Hole Table .Hole Table . All Rights Reserved 493 . On the Panel Bar. Select the holes to include in the table. You can select the holes individually or by dragging a selection window around the holes to include. Then position the hole table on the sheet. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. 4.Selection Tool . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Selection tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table.

494 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . The Hole Table and Tags appear on the drawing. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. On the Panel Bar.View tool. click the Hole Table . Position the Hole Table on the sheet. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table with the Hole Table . 3.View tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table.View Tool . It is not necessary to select the holes as all holes in the view will be included in the Hole Table. 2.5. Hole Table .

The Hole Table and Tags appear on the sheet. All Rights Reserved 495 . Inc. Select one hole of each type you want to include in the hole table. 3.Selected Type tool. Right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. 4. click the Hole Table . Hole Table .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table . 2. On the Panel Bar.4. 1.Selected Type tool and select the view containing the holes to be included in the hole table. then position the hole table on Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Selected Type .

To split the hole table. right-click on the row you would like to split and click Table > Split 496 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Only the holes matching the type of hole selected are included in the hole table. Editing Hole Tables After you create the hole table. you can edit the table in a number of different ways. 5. Right-click on the hole table to reveal several different options to edit the appearance and information contained within the table.the sheet.

Selecting Add will enable you to select another hole previously not included in the table and add it to the list. right-click on the hole table and click Row > Add or Remove. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. All Rights Reserved 497 . To add or remove holes from the table. Selecting Remove will remove the hole in the selected row from the Hole Table.The table is split into two and can be moved to a different location.

Options .Enables you to edit the text used for the hole tag.Presents the Edit Hole Table dialog box. The tag will change in the table and in the drawing view.You can control the visibility of hole table elements by right-clicking on the hole table and selecting Visibility > • • • • Origin .Hides all Tags Show All Tags . See below for more information.Controls the visibility of the origin indicator Tag . 498 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Shows all Tags Right-click on the hole table and select Edit > • • Edit Tag . Hide All Tags .Controls the visibility of the selected tag.

Combine Notes: This option combines the notes cells for identical holes. Line Weight: Enter line weights and colors for the table. Available Properties: Select the available properties to include in the list by selecting the property and clicking the Add button. Numbering: This option replaces the alphanumeric tags with sequential hole numbers. Only the first hole of each hole type is listed in the table. Bottom. You cannot delete a default column New Field: Select to create a custom column that you can use to add data to the hole table. Remove properties by selecting the property in the Selected Properties list and clicking Remove. or None. The position in the list represents the order of columns in the table left to right. Delete: Select to delete a custom column. All Rights Reserved 499 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Selected Properties: Lists the currently selected properties appearing as columns in the table. Move Up/Move Down: Adjust the order of the selected properties. Select the inside or outside button to set properties for each. Inc. Rollup: This option combines the hole's table rows of the same type in the hole table.Edit Hole Table Dialog Box The following options are available in the Edit Hole Table dialog box. Title Position: Select a title position of Top.

Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks Several tools are available to annotate your drawing with centerlines and centermarks. The Centerline Settings dialog box enables you to set various criteria for the automated centerlines. 500 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Only the features matching the type(s) selected and meeting the threshold settings will receive automatic centerlines. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines Placing Centerlines and Center Marks Automatically You can place centerlines and centermarks automatically in a view by using the Automated Centerline tool. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access centerline and centermark tools. Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines from the shortcut menu. You can place these annotations manually using the different tools available or place them automatically using the Automated Centerline tool.

All Rights Reserved 501 . click Document Settings. Inc. Setting these options in the Document Settings will store the settings in the drawing or template. Threshold: • • • Fillet: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for fillets to receive automatic centerlines.Centerline Settings Apply To: Select the types of features you would like to automatically apply centerlines or centermarks Projection: Select the view projection. then click the Drawing Tab and select the Automated Centerline Settings button. Circular Edges: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for circular edges to receive automatic centerlines. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. alleviating the task of having to set these options each time. On the Tools menu. Note: These settings can also be set in the Document Settings for the drawing. Precision: Set the precision to be used when analyzing the features against the threshold values.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying centerlines automatically to a drawing view. 1. 502 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Creating Automatic Centerlines . The automatic centerlines are applied to features matching the selected type and threshold settings. Adjust the feature type and threshold options and click OK. 3. 2. Right-click on the drawing view and click Automated Centerlines.

On the Panel Bar. click the Center Mark tool. 2. All Rights Reserved 503 . 1. The center mark is added to the drawing view. Select a circular shape or feature. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3.Using the Center Mark Tool . Continue selecting circular features or right-click and select Done. Inc. 4.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Center Mark tool.

1. On the Panel Bar. 2. 504 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Select the next edge for the centerline to pass through. The midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu. 3. Then centerline is created passing through the midpoint of each selected edge.Using the Centerline Tool .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline tool to add centerlines to your drawing view. click the Centerline tool and select an edge. Again the midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated.

Select the second edge. All Rights Reserved 505 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3.Using the Centerline Bisector Tool .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline Bisector tool to add centerlines to your drawing views. The centerline is calculated and drawn by bisecting the angle of the two edges selected. click the Centerline Bisector tool and select the first edge to bisect. On the Panel Bar. Inc. 1. 2.

2. 1. As soon as you select two features. 506 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . then right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu. 4.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centered Pattern tool to place centerlines on your drawing view.Using the Centered Pattern Tool . On the Panel Bar. Continue selecting features as required. 3. Click the location representing the center of the pattern. the circular centerline will appear. click the Centered Pattern tool. Select the features of the pattern.

Inc. Text Format: Adjust the text formatting options such as justification. All Rights Reserved 507 . The leaders are associative to the view and will move if the view moves. use the Format Text dialog box to add text to your drawing. and width as required. the Leader Text tool attaches a leader with text to the geometry within the view. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. color.Select the component to be used for parameters. Style: Select a text style for the text or accept the default text style listed. Panel Bar Panel Bar Common to both the Text and Leader Text tools. Format Text Dialog Box The following options are available in the Format Text dialog box. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Text and Leader Text tools. Component: Optional . While you use the Text tool to place paragraph style text on the sheet.Notes and Leaders You use the Text and Leader Text tools to add notes and leaders to the drawing views.

Source: Optional - Select Model Parameters or User Parameters. Parameter: Optional - Select the parameter to use in the text. Precision: Optional - Enter a precision for the parameter value. d0 Button: Optional - Click to add the selected parameter to the text window. Text Font: Select a font from the drop-down list. Height: Enter or select a text height. If you enter a text height once, it will be available in the list for future text in this drawing. Symbols Flyout: Select a special symbol to insert into the text.

Adding Text - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding text to the drawing. 1. On the Panel Bar, click the Text tool and click and drag the rectangle text boundary.

2.

In the Format Text dialog box, enter the text, adjust options as required and click OK.

Adding Leader Text - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding leader text to your drawing.

508

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

1.

On the Panel Bar, click the Leader Text tool then select a start point and second point for the leader.

2.

Right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.

3.

Enter the text for the leader and click OK.

4.

The leader text is attached to the drawing geometry.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

509

Editing Text
Right-click on a text object to access text editing options.

Text Shortcut Menu

Edit Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees counter clockwise.

Editing Leader Text
Right-click on a leader text object to access the text editing options.

Leader Text Shortcut Menu Options

Edit Leader Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Edit Arrowhead: Displays the Change Arrowhead dialog box. In the drop-down list, select a different arrowhead. Add Vertex / Leader: Select to add a vertex to the leader. Delete Leader: Select this option to delete the leader.

510

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Parts Lists
You use Parts lists to annotate an assembly drawing by creating a table of parts included in the drawing. When you create a parts list you must first select a view. The parts list is based upon components in the selected view.
Procedure

Access Methods
Using the following method to access the Parts List tool. Panel Bar

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

511

All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. • Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Creating a Parts List - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding a parts list to your drawing. 1. On the Panel Bar, click the Parts List tool and select a drawing view.

2.

Adjust the options in the Parts-List - Item Numbering dialog box as required and click OK.

3.

Left-click to position the parts list on the drawing.

512

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

4.

The parts list appears on the drawing.

Editing Parts Lists
After you create the parts list you can edit it to add/remove columns, merge rows, expand the display of subassemblies, and change other properties that control the display and content of the parts list. To edit a parts list, right-click on the parts list and select Edit Parts List on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

513

The Edit Parts List dialog box enables you to modify several different properties of the parts list. For more information on editing a parts list, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.

Edit Parts List Dialog Box

To add a column to the parts list, click the Column Chooser button. This will display the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box. Select from the available properties and click the ADD button to add the property to the selected property list.

Click OK to exit each dialog box. The new column will appear in the parts list on the drawing.

514

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Updating the Parts List
If changes occur in the assembly model being referenced by the parts list, the parts list may not automatically update. If the parts list requires an update, it is indicated by a red lightning bolt next to the parts list in the drawing browser. Right-click on the parts list in the browser or graphics window and click Update on the shortcut menu.

Note: Updating the parts list will remove any information manually input into the parts list columns or cells that have not been frozen. To protect a cell from being overwritten, in the Edit Parts List dialog box, right-click on the cell and select Freeze Value on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

515

Placing Balloons
You place balloons on assembly drawings to identify parts in the drawing and relate them to rows in the parts list. When you place a balloon on a part, the item number of the part will appear in the balloon. This item number is the same item number used in the parts list.
Procedure

Balloons and parts lists are associative. If an item number in the parts list changes, the change will also be reflected in the balloon. This associativity is unidirectional only. If you override the item number in the balloon, the new value is not reflected in the parts list.

Access Methods
Use the following methods to access the Balloon and Balloon All tools. Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut

B

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

516

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table. All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. • Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

517

Placing Individual Balloons .Item Numbering dialog box will appear. right-click and select Continue on the shortcut menu. Left-click to position the balloon then. click the Balloon tool and select a component in the drawing view. and there is no parts list in the drawing. the Parts List . 518 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Right-click in the graphics window and click Done when completed. 1. On the Panel Bar. If this is the first balloon. 3. Adjust the options as required and click OK.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for placing individual balloons on your drawing. 2. Continue selecting component and placing balloons as required.

Item Numbering dialog box will appear. If there is no parts list in the drawing.Placing Balloons Using the Balloon All Tool . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Adjust the options as required and click OK. 3. The balloons are automatically applied to the assembly components. You will also have to manually adjust the position of the balloons. Inc. On the Panel Bar. 2. the Parts List . click the Balloon All tool and select a drawing view. Click and drag on each balloon to reposition them as required. 1. Note: Balloons are only placed on the first occurrence of each part.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Balloon All tool to balloon all components in the drawing view at once. All Rights Reserved 519 .

To use the override value. select the cell and click OK Click the Item cell to use the original item number in the balloon. you can select a sketched symbol to use for the balloon.Editing Balloons After you place the balloons on the sheet. you can edit them by right-clicking on the balloon and selecting Edit Balloon on the shortcut menu. as well as override the balloon value. 520 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . The Edit Balloon dialog box enables you to change the balloon type. Balloon Value: Enter an override value in the override column. the new value is not reflected in the Parts List. Balloon Type: Clear this option in order to select a different balloon type. Symbols: If your drawing contains sketched symbols. Note: If you override the balloon value.

Exercise: General Annotation Placement In this exercise. you open the drawing file and use the tools learned in this lesson to annotate the drawing with centerlines. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 521 . click Exercise: General Annotation Placement The completed exercise is shown in the following image. notes. 2. parts lists and balloons. Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. leaders.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. dimensions styles and any other properties that would be required to complete the drawing to your company's standards. You will edit the drawing by modifying or creating views. drawing standards. From the Main table of contents page. you will open a drawing and assume this drawing must meet your own company standards.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings The completed exercise is shown in the following image. title blocks. annotation. 2. Challenge Exercise Drawing 522 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings.

How to apply different types of annotation objects to your drawing. You learned about the options available in the Break Out View dialog box and how to use these options to generate the required view. You also learned how the available options in the Broken View dialog box can effect the view as it is created. How to create section views of parts and assemblies. How to place additional reference dimensions on the sheet. How to create and edit Break Out views.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • How to create and utilize drafting standards. How to manage drawing views and sections by adjusting the alignment options as required. How to delete drawing views and copy and/or move views from one sheet to another in the current drawing. How to perform several functions related to managing drawing resources. How to create and edit auxiliary views. How to create and use text styles and dimension styles. and annotation associated with the detail view. How to create sketch geometry representing the section path and how to project isometric section views. The options available in the Drawing View dialog box and how they effect the drawing views when you create them. Inc. How to magnify a specific area on your drawing by creating detail views. How to create and edit broken views on your sheet. How to save text and dimension styles within a drawing template for later use. area effected. • • • • • • • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to create and edit base views and projected views. You also learned how to edit these views by changing the scale. How to retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing. All Rights Reserved 523 .

524 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Create a presentation file that documents assembly instructions for a completed assembly. You can find guidelines to aid in completing the models for the drawing files using the Electronic Student Workbook. • • • . To navigate to the exercises in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Project Exercise Review the goals and images of the drawings that follow. In this chapter After completing this chapter. click Overview Review the goals for the exercise and use the navigation buttons in the Electronic Student Workbook to work through the exercises. click Chapter 8: Project Exercise From the table of contents for Chapter 8: Project Exercise. you will be able to. 3. From the Main table of contents page. Create and assemble a number of parts based on parameters defined in 2D drawings. 2. Create 2D documentation on a created assembly file. • Create an assembly based on parameters defined in a 2D drawing...

Completed Irrigation Control Unit Objectives This all-inclusive exercise requires more than the design of a single part. The approach outlined in this exercise is not the only way to approach the design of this Irrigation Control Unit. and generate a drawing of the assembly showing part interaction. During this process you assembly the parts you design. 526 Chapter 8: Project Exercise . You will design each part of the Irrigation Control Unit (ICU) from scratch. perform interference detection. and generating drawings of individual parts and the assembly of those parts. calculate mass properties. you create the assembly model for the ICU. It incorporates the design and documentation of seven separate parts and an assembly of 14 components.Irrigation Control Unit Overview Overview Overview In this exercise you build the Irrigation Control Unit shown below. After you model and detail each part. analyzing. assembly instructions. and a bill of materials. The approach shown here is intended to illustrate the use of Autodesk Inventor software for modeling.

Design Goals The Irrigation Control Unit documented in this project controls the flow of a solution to two separate locations through the use of Right and Left Buttons. This list describes your design criteria for the entire ICU exercise. The following is a list of goals or rules for the creation of the Irrigation Control Unit. Solution flow is controlled by Valves located in the main cavities of the ICU. You will gain the greatest benefit from this exercise by completing the design and documentation of each part as well as the assembly. or both gates provided in the Valves and out the exit tubes. All parts must be created in Metric (mm) units. When the Valve is in the open position.The average time required to complete this exercise varies. Components (other than the rubber O-Rings) must not interfere. Inc. the solution flows through the right. left. All Rights Reserved 527 . When a button is pressed. • • • • All parts must be fully parametric and have individual part drawings. the solution from the main flow tube is restricted from flowing through the Valve and out the exit tubes. Individual part design goals are provided as that portion of the exercise is presented to you. but should take no longer than 6-8 hours. By completing this exercise you will explore the following Autodesk Inventor capabilities: Using Feature Patterns Defining Tapped Holes Using Hole Notes Using Parameters and Linking Mirroring Parts Using Construction Lines Part Drawing Creation Presentation File Creation Attaching Balloons to Components Generating Mass Properties Assembly Drawing Creation Constraining Components Using Projected Edges Copying Sketches Using To-Face Terminations Shelling Parts Interference Detection Tweaking and Applying Trails Generating a Bill of Materials Part Modification in an Assembly It is recommended that you create all of the parts contained in the Irrigation Control Unit by following the instructions in this exercise. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the solution from the main flow tube of the ICU flows through the exit tube. When the Valve is in the closed position. Parts must be designed to match the following drawings.

Irrigation Control Unit .Closed Position 528 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

All Rights Reserved 529 . Inc.Open Position Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Irrigation Control Unit .

Valve Housing 530 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

All Rights Reserved 531 . Inc.Completed Irrigation Control Unit Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Valve 532 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Inc. All Rights Reserved 533 .Left and Right Buttons Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

534 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful